Ricoh D197 Service Manual
  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. Ricoh Manuals
  4. All in One Printer
  5. D197
  6. Service manual

Ricoh D197 Service Manual

Hide thumbs Also See for D197:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889
890
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
914
915
916
917
918
919
920
921
922
923
924
925
926
927
928
929
930
931
932
933
934
935
936
937
938
939
940
941
942
943
944
945
946
947
948
949
950
951
952
953
954
955
956
957
958
959
960
961
962
963
964
965
966
967
968
969
970
971
972
973
974
975
976
977
978
979
980
981
982
983
984
985
986
987
988
989
990
Table of Contents

Advertisement

Quick Links

SERVICE MANUAL
D197/D198/D199/
D200/D201/D202

Advertisement

Table of Contents
loading

Related Manuals for Ricoh D197

Summary of Contents for Ricoh D197

  • Page 1 SERVICE MANUAL D197/D198/D199/ D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 2 It is the reader's responsibility when discussing the information contained within this document to maintain a level of confidentiality that is in the best interest of Ricoh Americas Corporation and its member companies. NO PART OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE REPRODUCED IN ANY FASHION AND DISTRIBUTED WITHOUT THE PRIOR PERMISSION OF RICOH AMERICAS CORPORATION.
  • Page 3 Ricoh Technical Training Program. Untrained uncertified users utilizing information contained in this service manual to repair or modify Ricoh equipment risk personal injury, damage to property or loss of warranty protection. Ricoh Americas Corporation...
  • Page 4 LEGEND COMPANY PRODUCT CODE LANIER RICOH SAVIN D197 MP 2554SP MP 2554SP MP 2554SP D198 MP 3054SP MP 3054SP MP 3054SP D199 MP 3554SP MP 3554SP MP 3554SP D200 MP 4054SP MP 4054SP MP 4054SP D201 MP 5054SP MP 5054SP...

  • Page 5: Table Of Contents

    D202 (Asia) ..................1-33 Guidance for Those Who are Familiar with The Predecessor Product 1-35 1.2.2 DIFFERENCES BETWEEN SIMILAR MODELS......1-35 D182/D183 vs. D197/D199 ..............1-35 D129/D130 vs. D200/D201/D202 ............1-36 Differences between D146 Series ............1-37 2. INSTALLATION ................2-1 2.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ............
  • Page 6 2.2 MAIN MACHINE INSTALLATION .............. 2-4 2.2.1 IMPORTANT NOTICE ON SECURITY ISSUES ....... 2-4 Overview ....................2-4 Password Setting Procedure ..............2-5 2.2.2 INSTALLATION FLOW CHART ............2-9 D197/D198/D199.................. 2-9 D200/D201/D202................2-10 2.2.3 ACCESSORY CHECK ..............2-11 2.2.4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ............2-12 Unloading ................... 2-12 Tapes and Retainers ................
  • Page 7 2.14.1 ACCESSORY CHECK .............. 2-90 2.14.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ..........2-91 2.15 BOOKLET FINISHER SR3170 / FINISHER SR3160 ......2-94 2.15.1 ACCESSORY CHECK .............. 2-94 Booklet Finisher SR3170 (D688) / Finisher SR3160 (D689) ....2-94 2.15.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ..........2-95 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 8 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ..........2-166 Anti-Condensation Heater (Scanner) ..........2-166 Anti-Condensation Heater (PCU) ............. 2-176 2.24 ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER FOR TRAYS ......2-180 2.24.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ............2-180 2.24.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ..........2-181 Anti-Condensation Heater for Paper Feed Tray (Main Unit) ..... 2-181 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 9 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ..........2-229 2.34 FILE FORMAT CONVERTER TYPE E ..........2-230 2.34.1 COMPONENT CHECK ............2-230 2.34.2 INSTALLATION ............... 2-230 2.35 USB DEVICE SERVER OPTION TYPE M12 ........2-232 2.35.1 COMPONENT CHECK ............2-232 Interface Board Surface ..............2-232 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 10 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ..........2-258 2.43 POSTSCRIPT3 UNIT TYPE M12 ............. 2-260 2.43.1 COMPONENT CHECK ............2-260 2.43.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ..........2-260 2.44 XPS DIRECT PRINT OPTION TYPE M12 ........2-262 2.44.1 COMPONENT CHECK ............2-262 2.44.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ..........2-262 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 11 3.2.4 PITCH ERROR MARGIN ..............3-4 3.2.5 PERPENDICULARITY ..............3-4 3.2.6 LINEARITY ..................3-5 3.2.7 PARALLELISM ................. 3-5 3.2.8 MISSING IMAGE AREA ..............3-6 3.2.9 MARGIN POSITION ................. 3-6 3.3 PAPER TRANSFER QUALITY STANDARDS ........... 3-7 3.3.1 REGISTRATION ................3-7 3.3.2 SKEW ....................3-7 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 12 RIGHT UPPER COVER ............4-19 4.5.14 RIGHT COVER ................. 4-20 4.5.15 MAIN POWER SWITCH COVER ..........4-22 4.5.16 INVERTER TRAY..............4-22 4.5.17 PAPER EXIT TRAY..............4-23 4.5.18 PAPER EXIT COVER ............... 4-23 4.5.19 PAPER EXIT LOWER COVER ..........4-24 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 viii...
  • Page 13 Scanner Wire Assembly (Rear) ............4-57 4.7.11 MODIFYING THE SCANNER (CONTACT/CONTACTLESS) WHEN USING ARDF ................... 4-60 Procedure for the ADF ............... 4-60 Procedure for the Scanner ..............4-62 4.7.12 MODIFYING THE SCANNER (CONTACT/CONTACTLESS) WHEN USING SPDF ................... 4-63 Procedure for the SPDF ..............4-63 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 14 TONER COLLECTION FULL SENSOR ........4-93 4.10.3 RECYCLING SHUTTER SOLENOID ........4-94 4.10.4 RECYCLING SHUTTER ............4-97 4.11 TRANSFER UNIT................4-99 4.11.1 TRANSFER UNIT..............4-99 4.11.2 TRANSFER ROLLER UNIT ............ 4-101 4.11.3 ID SENSOR ................4-102 Before Replacing the ID Sensor ............4-102 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 15 DRIVE UNIT ..................4-107 4.12.1 DRUM/WASTE TONER MOTOR ..........4-107 4.12.2 DEVELOPMENT MOTOR ............4-107 4.12.3 FUSING/PAPER EXIT MOTOR (D197/D199 ONLY) ....4-107 4.12.4 FUSING MOTOR (D200/D201/D202 ONLY) ......4-108 4.12.5 PAPER EXIT MOTOR (D200/D201/D202 ONLY) ....4-108 4.12.6 REGISTRATION MOTOR ............4-108 4.12.7...
  • Page 16 TORQUE LIMITER ..............4-158 4.17.7 BYPASS WIDTH SENSOR ............. 4-159 4.17.8 BYPASS LENGTH SENSOR ..........4-161 4.18 PCBS AND OTHER ITEMS ............. 4-162 4.18.1 OVERVIEW ................4-162 Around the Controller Box ..............4-162 Around the Power Supply Box ............4-163 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 17 Registration: Platen Mode ..............4-195 Magnification ..................4-196 4.20.3 SCANNER WIRE ..............4-197 4.20.4 ADF IMAGE ADJUSTMENT ........... 4-197 Registration ..................4-197 Sub Scan Magnification ..............4-198 4.20.5 TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION ........... 4-199 5. SYSTEM MAINTENANCE ............. 5-1 xiii D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 18 SP6-XXX (PERIPHERALS) ............. 5-219 5.11 SP MODE TABLES - SP7000-1 ............5-237 5.11.1 SP7-XXX (DATA LOG) ............5-237 5.12 SP MODE TABLES - SP7000-2 ............5-257 5.12.1 SP7-XXX (DATA LOG) ............5-257 5.13 SP MODE TABLES - SP8000-1 ............5-276 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 19 5.19 TEST PATTERN PRINTING ............5-408 5.20 FIRMWARE UPDATE ..............5-410 5.20.1 OVERVIEW ................5-410 5.20.2 FIRMWARE TYPE ..............5-410 5.20.3 PROCEDURE ................. 5-411 Update procedure................5-412 5.20.4 ERROR SCREENS DURING UPDATING ......5-416 5.21 UPDATING JAVAVM ............... 5-424 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 20 How to Set the Machine to Download Firmware Later (RESERVE) . 5-450 How to Check if the Firmware Downloaded with RESERVE .... 5-452 How to Install Firmware Downloaded with RESERVE ...... 5-454 5.27.4 UPDATE VIA SD CARD ............5-456 5.28 CAPTURING THE DEBUG LOGS ........... 5-459 5.28.1 OVERVIEW ................5-459 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 21 6.9.1 SC816 TO SC899 ................. 6-128 6.10 SC TABLES: SC9XX (OTHERS)............6-165 6.10.1 SC900-00 TO SC995-04 ............6-165 6.11 WHEN SC549 IS DISPLAYED ............6-171 6.11.1 TROUBLESHOOTING FLOWCHART ........6-171 6.11.2 FUSING SHIELD CHECK ............6-172 6.11.3 SOLUTION ................6-175 xvii D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 22 HOW TO RE-INSTALL THE OCR UNIT TYPE M2 ....6-205 6.13.9 PAPER CURL PROBLEM FOR SR3180 ........ 6-205 6.14 BLOWN FUSE CONDITION ............6-208 Fuse: NA ..................6-208 Fuse: EU ..................6-209 Fuse Location ................... 6-210 7. ENERGY SAVING ................. 7-1 7.1 ENERGY SAVING ..................7-1 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 xviii...
  • Page 23 1. Duplex: ..................... 7-4 2. Combine mode: ................7-4 3. Duplex + Combine: ................7-5 Paper Savings and Counter ..............7-5 Duplex mode: ..................7-6 2 in 1 mode: ..................7-7 Duplex + 2 in 1 mode: ................7-8 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 25 READ THIS FIRST Important Safety Notices Safety Prevention of Physical Injury Before disassembling or assembling parts of the machine and peripherals, make sure that the machine and peripheral power cords are unplugged. The plug should be near the machine and easily accessible. Note that some components of the machine and the paper tray unit are supplied with electrical voltage even if the main power switch is turned off.

  • Page 26: Laser Safety

    regulations. (These are non-toxic supplies.) Dispose of replaced parts in accordance with local regulations. When keeping used lithium batteries in order to dispose of them later, do not put more than 100 batteries per sealed box. Storing larger numbers or not sealing them apart may lead to chemical reactions and heat build-up.
  • Page 27 WARNING FOR LASER UNIT WARNING: Turn off the main switch before attempting any of the procedures in the Laser Unit section. Laser beams can seriously damage your eyes. CAUTION MARKING: Safety Precautions for This Machine Before moving the mainframe:  Disconnect all peripheral units (finisher, LCT, etc.) from the mainframe.
  • Page 28 Timing belt Spring Short Edge Feed Long Edge Feed [A] Short Edge Feed (SEF) [B] Long Edge Feed (LEF) Trademarks ® ® ® Microsoft , Windows , and MS-DOS are registered trademarks of ® PostScript is a registered trademark Microsoft Corporation in the United States and /or other countries.of Adobe Systems, Incorporated.

  • Page 29: Product Information

    PRODUCT INFORMATION R E V I S I O N H I S T O RY Pag e Date Ad d ed / Upd ated / New None...

  • Page 31: Product Overview

    Product Overview 1. PRODUCT INFORMATION 1.1 PRODUCT OVERVIEW 1.1.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 32 Product Overview Description Description Scanner Unit Bypass Tray Unit Reverse Unit Vertical Transport Paper Exit Unit Paper Feed Unit Fusing Unit Laser Unit OPC Drum Toner Supply Unit Duplex Unit D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 33: Paper Path

    Product Overview 1.1.2 PAPER PATH Description Description ARDF Booklet Finisher LCIT Bridge Unit LCIT (Tandem Tray) D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 34 Product Overview Description Description ARDF Paper Feed Unit LCIT Internal Finisher D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 35 Product Overview Description Description Platen Cover Side Tray Unit Paper Feed Unit 1 Bin Tray Unit D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 36: Drive Layout

    Product Overview 1.1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 37 Development motor only) Reverse motor Vertical transport motor Fusing motor (D200/D201/D202 only) Duplex/bypass motor Fusing/paper exit motor (D197/D198/D199 only) Drum/waste toner motor Paper feed motor Duplex entrance motor Paper feed tray lift motor Transfer roller contact motor Toner supply motor...

  • Page 38: Parts Layout

    Product Overview 1.1.4 PARTS LAYOUT Scanner Unit Description Description Operation panel Scanner lamp unit (LED) Scanner motor Scanner HP sensor APS sensor Anti-condensation heater (Scanner) APS sensor *Option DF-position sensor D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 39: Paper Feed Unit

    2nd paper feed tray lift motor 2nd paper feed tray limit sensor Registration sensor 2nd vertical transport sensor 1st paper feed tray size switch 2nd paper end sensor 2nd paper feed tray size switch 2nd paper feed sensor Anti-condensation heater *Option D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 40: Laser Unit/ Pcdu

    Product Overview Laser Unit/ PCDU Description Description Laser Unit TD sensor Quenching lamp PCL (Pre Cleaning Light) D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 1-10...

  • Page 41: Fusing Unit

    Fusing Unit Description Description Fusing thermopile (End) Thermostat (End) Fusing thermopile (Center) Thermostat (Center) Fusing exit sensor Fusing roller temperature sensor (Center) Pressure roller temperature sensor Fusing roller temperature sensor (End) (End) Pressure roller temperature sensor Fusing lamp (Center) 1-11 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 42: Waste Toner Bottle

    Product Overview Waste Toner Bottle Description Description Drum/waste toner motor Toner collection full sensor D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 1-12...

  • Page 43: Duplex/Bypass Unit

    Product Overview Duplex/Bypass Unit Description Description Right cover open/close switch Bypass length sensor Duplex entrance sensor Bypass pickup solenoid Duplex entrance motor Bypass width switch Duplex guide switch Bypass paper end sensor Duplex/bypass motor Duplex exit sensor 1-13 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 44: Paper Exit/ Reverse Unit

    Product Overview Paper Exit/ Reverse Unit Description Description Paper exit switching solenoid Transfer unit open/close sensor Paper exit sensor Fusing entrance sensor Reverse sensor Transfer Contact Sensor Paper exit full sensor Temperature/Humidity Sensor Reverse motor D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 1-14...

  • Page 45: Air Flow

    Product Overview Air Flow Description Description Development bearing cooling fan PSU cooling fan(D200/D201/D202 (D200/D201/D202 only) only) Fusing fan Development exhaust fan Paper exit cooling fan Temperature sensor 1-15 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 46: Drive Unit

    Product Overview Drive Unit Description Description Paper exit motor (D200/D201/D202 Development motor only) Fusing motor (D200/D201/D202 only) Vertical transport motor Fusing/paper exit motor (D197/D198/D199 only) Drum/Waste toner motor Paper feed motor Registration motor D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 1-16...

  • Page 47: Electrical Component

    Product Overview Electrical Component Description Description Main power switch Interlock switch (Front Cover) IPU-sub (only for machines with an SPDF installed) DHB (Option) Controller Board Interlock Switch (Right Cover) 1-17 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 48: Machine Codes And Peripherals Configuration

    Machine Codes and Peripherals Configuration 1.2 MACHINE CODES AND PERIPHERALS CONFIGURATION 1.2.1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND OPTIONS D197/D198/D199 (NA) Item Machine Code Smart Operation Panel Type M3 D148 Handset HS3020 D739 Paper Feed Unit PB3150 D694 Caster Table Type M3 D178...
  • Page 49 Paper Feed Unit PB3210 D787 1 Bin Tray BN3110 D692 Bridge Unit BU3070 D685 Internal Shift Tray SH3070 D691 Side Tray Type M3 D725 Internal Finisher SR3130 D690 Internal Finisher SR3180 D766 Finisher SR3140 D687 Booklet Finisher SR3150 D686 1-19 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 50: D200/D201 (Na)

    Item Machine Code Smart Operation Panel Type M3 D148 Handset HS3020 D739 Paper Feed Unit PB3150 D694 Caster Table Type M3 D178 LCIT PB3170 D695 LCIT RT3030 D696 Paper Feed Unit PB3210 D787 1 Bin Tray BN3110 D692 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 1-20...
  • Page 51 Machine Codes and Peripherals Configuration Item Machine Code Bridge Unit BU3070 D685 Internal Shift Tray SH3070 D691 Side Tray Type M3 D725 Internal Finisher SR3130 D690 Finisher SR3140 D687 Booklet Finisher SR3150 D686 Finisher SR3160 D689 Booklet Finisher SR3170 D688 1-21 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 52: D202 (Na)

    Handset HS3020 D739 Paper Feed Unit PB3150 D694 Caster Table Type M3 D178 LCIT PB3170 D695 LCIT RT3030 D696 Paper Feed Unit PB3210 D787 1 Bin Tray BN3110 D692 Bridge Unit BU3070 D685 Internal Shift Tray SH3070 D691 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 1-22...
  • Page 53 Machine Codes and Peripherals Configuration Item Machine Code Side Tray Type M3 D725 Finisher SR3140 D687 Booklet Finisher SR3150 D686 Finisher SR3160 D689 Booklet Finisher SR3170 D688 1-23 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 54: D197/D198/D199 (Eu)

    Machine Codes and Peripherals Configuration D197/D198/D199 (EU) Item Machine Code Paper Feed Unit PB3150 D694 Caster Table Type M3 D178 LCIT PB3170 D695 LCIT RT3030 D696 Paper Feed Unit PB3210 D787 1 Bin Tray BN3110 D692 Bridge Unit BU3070 D685...
  • Page 55 Internal Finisher SR3130 D690 Internal Finisher SR3180 D766 Finisher SR3140 D687 Booklet Finisher SR3150 D686 * Smart Operation Panel Type M3 (D148) is not provided as an option for Europe; however, Smart Operation Panel embedded models are provided. 1-25 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 56: D200/D201 (Eu)

    Paper Feed Unit PB3150 D694 Caster Table Type M3 D178 LCIT PB3170 D695 LCIT RT3030 D696 Paper Feed Unit PB3210 D787 1 Bin Tray BN3110 D692 Bridge Unit BU3070 D685 Internal Shift Tray SH3070 D691 Side Tray Type M3 D725 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 1-26...
  • Page 57 D690 Finisher SR3140 D766 Booklet Finisher SR3150 D686 Finisher SR3160 D689 Booklet Finisher SR3170 D688 * Smart Operation Panel Type M3 (D148) is not provided as an option for Europe; however, Smart Operation Panel embedded models are provided. 1-27 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 58: D202 (Eu)

    Caster Table Type M3 D178 LCIT PB3170 D695 LCIT RT3030 D696 Paper Feed Unit PB3210 D787 1 Bin Tray BN3110 D692 Bridge Unit BU3070 D685 Internal Shift Tray SH3070 D691 Side Tray Type M3 D725 Finisher SR3140 D687 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 1-28...
  • Page 59 Machine Codes and Peripherals Configuration Item Machine Code Booklet Finisher SR3150 D686 Finisher SR3160 D689 Booklet Finisher SR3170 D688 * Smart Operation Panel Type M3 (D148) is not provided as an option for Europe; however, Smart Operation Panel embedded models are provided. 1-29 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 60: D197/D198/D199 (Asia)

    Machine Codes and Peripherals Configuration D197/D198/D199 (Asia) Item Machine Code Platen Cover PN2000 D700 ARDF DF3090 D779 Smart Operation Panel Type M3 D148 Paper Feed Unit PB3150 D694 Caster Table Type M3 D178 LCIT PB3170 D695 LCIT RT3030 D696 Paper Feed Unit PB3210...
  • Page 61 Machine Codes and Peripherals Configuration Item Machine Code Bridge Unit BU3070 D685 Internal Shift Tray SH3070 D691 Side Tray Type M3 D725 Internal Finisher SR3130 D690 Internal Finisher SR3180 D766 Finisher SR3140 D687 Booklet Finisher SR3150 D686 1-31 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 62: D200/D201 (Asia)

    SPDF DF3080 D683 ARDF DF3090 D779 Smart Operation Panel Type M3 D148 Paper Feed Unit PB3150 D694 Caster Table Type M3 D178 LCIT PB3170 D695 LCIT RT3030 D696 Paper Feed Unit PB3210 D787 1 Bin Tray BN3110 D692 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 1-32...

  • Page 63: D202 (Asia)

    Machine Codes and Peripherals Configuration Item Machine Code Bridge Unit BU3070 D685 Internal Shift Tray SH3070 D691 Side Tray Type M3 D725 Internal Finisher SR3130 D690 Finisher SR3140 D687 Booklet Finisher SR3150 D686 Finisher SR3160 D689 Booklet Finisher SR3170 D688 D202 (Asia) 1-33 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 64 Paper Feed Unit PB3210 D787 1 Bin Tray BN3110 D692 Bridge Unit BU3070 D685 Internal Shift Tray SH3070 D691 Side Tray Type M3 D725 Finisher SR3140 D687 Booklet Finisher SR3150 D686 Finisher SR3160 D689 Booklet Finisher SR3170 D688 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 1-34...

  • Page 65: Guidance For Those Who Are Familiar With The Predecessor Product

    Machine Codes and Peripherals Configuration Guidance for Those Who are Familiar with The Predecessor Product 1.2.2 DIFFERENCES BETWEEN SIMILAR MODELS D182/D183 vs. D197/D199 Item D182/D183 D197/D199 Paper Feed Mainframe (Friction Reverse Roller) (Roller Friction) Scan Method Non-Contact Non-Contact PCDU Service Unit...

  • Page 66: D129/D130 Vs. D200/D201/D202

    Waste Toner Bottle Laser 2ch-LD 2ch-LD Parts Unit Sub parts Main-unit Electrical CTL board Common Not common between Basic Component and SP models Option Standard Stapleless Stapler Option Not Available Available Method Logging Counter Remaining Counter (New PM) D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 1-36...

  • Page 67: Differences Between D146 Series

    Machine Codes and Peripherals Configuration Differences between D146 Series Item D146 D197/D199/D200/D201/D202 1st Tray A4 fixed A3 universal Paper Feed 2nd Tray Up to A3 full-bleed Up to A3 Tray pull-in mechanism Tray pull-in mechanism No Tray pull-in mechanism Toner...

  • Page 69: Installation

    INSTALLATION R E V I S I O N H I S T O RY P a ge D a t e A d de d /U pd at e d /N ew 161 ~ 164 1/16/2015 Installation – Smart Op Panel Type M3 7/9/2015 USB DEVICE SERVER OPTION TYPE M12 234 ~ 235...

  • Page 71: Installation Requirements

    10. Do not place the machine where it may be subjected to strong vibrations. 2.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL Front to back: Within 5 mm (0.2") of level Right to left: Within 5 mm (0.2") of level 2.1.3 MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS Place the copier near the power source, and provide clearance as shown: D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 72: Machine Dimensions

    If an operator stands at the front of the copier, more space is required. 2.1.4 MACHINE DIMENSIONS [A]: 587 mm (23.1") [B]: 340mm (with D696) [C]: 1210 mm (with D683), 1160 mm (with D779) [D]: 657 mm (with D688 or D689) D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 73: Power Requirements

    110V, 60 Hz: More than 13.6 A: Taiwan  220V,60Hz More than 8A:KO Voltage tolerance  Voltage must not fluctuate by more than +8.66% or less than -10%.: NA  Voltage must not fluctuate by more than 10%.: EU/AP D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 74: Main Machine Installation

    Press the [OK] button, then the home display appears.  SP5-755-002 allows you to skip this screen temporarily and continue the installation procedure without setting an administrator password. However, the Program/Change Administrator screen appears every time you turn the power OFF/ON, if the password is not set. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 75: Password Setting Procedure

    ON if the passwords are input this way. So we recommend the customers to set the passwords via network or the Program/Change Administrator screen. Install the MFP. Turn the main power switch ON. Change the Supervisor login password. Input the password. Press [OK]. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 76 Main Machine Installation Confirm the Password. Press [OK]. Change the Administrator 1 login password. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 77 Main Machine Installation Input the password. 10. Press [OK]. 11. Confirm the password. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 78 Main Machine Installation 12. Press [OK]. 13. Cycle the power OFF/ON. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 79: Installation Flow Chart

    Main Machine Installation 2.2.2 INSTALLATION FLOW CHART D197/D198/D199 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 80: D200/D201/D202

    Main Machine Installation D200/D201/D202 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-10...

  • Page 81: Accessory Check

    Original Table Decal Glass Cleaner Holder Logo Plate: Type GES Logo Plate: Type LAN :Logo Plate: Type RIC Power Supply Cord (120V:15A:NA) NA only Power Supply Cord (250V:10A:EU) EU and Asia only Exposure Glass Sheet: Stopper: Paper Exit Tray 2-11 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 82: Installation Procedure

     Keep the shipping retainers after installing the machine. They will be reused if the machine is moved to another location in the future. Remove the tapes on the exterior of the copier. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-12...
  • Page 83 If the ADF is installed, remove the tapes and retainers on the ADF as well. Remove the cushioning material [A] on the exposure glass. Pull out the 1st and 2nd paper feed trays and remove the tapes and accessories. 2-13 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 84 Main Machine Installation Remove the scanner support [A] Open the front cover and store the scanner support [A] in the storage location.  The factory setting sheet is kept in the storage location. Close the front cover. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-14...

  • Page 85: Toner Bottle

    This machine has toner bottle set detection and does not operate without the toner bottle.  D197, D198, and D199 toner bottles are compatible with D200, D201, and D202. However, D200, D201, and D202 toner bottles are incompatible with D197, D198, and D199.
  • Page 86 SP mode from the copy window. Set the setting of SP3-510-031(ImgQltyAdj :ExeFlag: Init Toner Replenish: K) to “1”, and then press “#” on the operation panel. Press [EXIT] to end the SP mode. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-16...
  • Page 87 11. Enter SP mode again, and then press [System Sp]. 12. Enter SP7-622-250 (PM Counter Reset: SCS), and then press [Execute]. 2-17 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 88 14. Enter SP3-011-001 (Manual ProCon :Exe), and then press [Execute].  Be sure to do this procedure in the main machine installation. Otherwise, abnormal images may be developed until the next process control. 15. Press [Exit] when completed. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-18...
  • Page 89 1. Open the front cover for five seconds or more. 2. Make sure that the toner bottle is set properly. 3. Close the front cover. 4. The toner end recovery automatically starts 2-19 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 90: Paper Exit Tray Stopper

    Paper Exit Tray Stopper Attach the stopper [A] to the paper exit tray.  Before installing the stopper, move the bar inside the stopper in order to avoid damaging the bar. Hook the bar [A] onto the paper exit tray. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-20...

  • Page 91: Emblem, Decals

    Main Machine Installation Emblem, Decals Paste the decals on the specified locations. [A]: Tray number decal [B]: Paper size decal 2-21 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 92: Completion

    When installing a new machine, it is recommended to activate the Data Overwrite Security and HDD Encryption by selecting "Format All Data" from “System Settings” on the operation panel. For details, refer to the “Security Settings page 2-275”. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-22...

  • Page 93: Check Image Quality / Settings

    Tray 2: 1 0: A4LEF or 1: LT LEF 5-181-006 Tray 2: 2 0: A3 or 1: DLT 5-181-007 Tray 2: 3 0: B4 or 1: LG 5-181-008 Tray 2: 4 0: B5 LEF or 1: Exe LEF 2-23 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 94: By-Pass Tray (By-Pass Size Detection)

    Close all the covers and trays.  Remove peripherals physically attached to the main machine: Paper feed unit, LCT and finisher.  Keep the machine horizontal and move it slowly. Tipping and excess vibrations may damage the machine. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-24...

  • Page 95: Transporting The Machine

    Take out the scanner stay from inside the front cover and install the scanner stay. Do one of the following steps:  Attach shipping tape to the covers and doors.  Shrink-wrap the machine tightly. 2-25 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 96: Paper Feed Unit Pb3210/ Pb3220

    Be sure to join the machine to the paper feed unit so as to prevent equipment from falling over.  If they are not connected, they may move and fall over, resulting in injury. Remove the orange tape and retainers. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-26...
  • Page 97 This may cause the paper feed unit to deform. Always connect the machine and paper feed unit properly. Pull out the 2nd paper feed tray. Using securing bracket as a screwdriver, fix the machine to the feed unit (spring washer: screw: M4×10: 1). 2-27 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 98 (step 6) (page 2-188).  If “LCIT RT3030” is to be installed, connect its harness prior to this step (step 6) (page 2-44). Attach the rear lower gap cover [A] ( x 2) Return the paper feed tray to the machine D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-28...
  • Page 99 10. Lock the casters of the paper feed unit. 11. Connect the power cord to the machine.  Stabilizers are attached to the machine when it is shipped. Do not remove it. 12. Turn the main power ON. 2-29 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 100 Tray3: Thick 2 -066 Tray3: Thick 2:1200 -060 Tray3: Thick 3 -067 Tray3: Thick 3:1200 -061 Tray3: Thick 4 -068 Tray3: Thick 4:1200 SP1-002-004 (Side-to-Side Registration Paper Tray 3)  For Tray 4 SP1-001-0xx (Leading Edge Registration Tray 4) D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-30...
  • Page 101 -072 Tray4: Thick 1 -079 Tray4: Thick 1:1200 -073 Tray4: Thick 2 -080 Tray4: Thick 2:1200 -074 Tray4: Thick 3 -081 Tray4: Thick 3:1200 -075 Tray4: Thick 4 -082 Tray4: Thick 4:1200 SP1-002-005 (Side-to-Side Registration Paper Tray 4) 2-31 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 102: Accessory Check

    Be sure to join the machine to the paper feed unit so as to prevent equipment from falling over.  If they are not connected, they may move and fall over, resulting in injury.  “Caster Table Type M3” is necessary to use this option. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-32...
  • Page 103 Remove the items provided (fixing screws, etc.) from the package. Install this option on the Caster Table (page 2-52). Holding the grips on the machine, align it with the locating pin [A], and place the machine on the paper feed unit. 2-33 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 104 Attach the securing brackets [A] to two positions on the left and right at the rear of the machine (screws: 1 each). Attach the rear lower gap cover [A] ( x 2) Return the paper feed tray to the machine. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-34...
  • Page 105 The tray number decal and paper size decal are packaged together with the machine. 11. Lock the casters of the paper feed unit. 12. Connect the power cord to the machine.  Stabilizers are attached to the paper feed unit when it is shipped. Do not remove them. 2-35 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 106 -058 Tray3: Thick 1 -065 Tray3: Thick 1:1200 -059 Tray3: Thick 2 -066 Tray3: Thick 2:1200 -060 Tray3: Thick 3 -067 Tray3: Thick 3:1200 -061 Tray3: Thick 4 -068 Tray3: Thick 4:1200 SP1-002-004 (Side-to-Side Registration Paper Tray 3) D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-36...

  • Page 107: Accessory Check

    If this option is installed with the power on, it may result in an electric shock or a malfunction.  Be sure to join the machine to the paper feed unit so as to prevent equipment from falling over.  If they are not connected, they may move and fall over, resulting in injury. 2-37 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 108 Remove the orange tape and retainers. Remove the items provided (fixing screws, etc.) from the package. Holding the grips on the machine, align it with the locating pin [A], and place the machine on the paper feed unit. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-38...
  • Page 109 If the anti-condensation heater for this optional tray is to be installed, connect its heater harness prior to this step (step 6) (page 2-192).  If “LCIT RT3030” is to be installed, connect its harness prior to this step (step 6) (page 2-44). 2-39 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 110 [A]: Tray number decal [B]: Paper size decal  The tray number decal and paper size decal are packaged together with the machine. 10. Lock the casters of the paper feed unit. 11. Connect the power cord to the machine. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-40...
  • Page 111 -058 Tray3: Thick 1 -065 Tray3: Thick 1:1200 -059 Tray3: Thick 2 -066 Tray3: Thick 2:1200 -060 Tray3: Thick 3 -067 Tray3: Thick 3:1200 -061 Tray3: Thick 4 -068 Tray3: Thick 4:1200 SP1-002-004 (Side-to-Side Registration Paper Tray 3) 2-41 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 112: Changing The Paper Size

    Attach the fences to the required position (A4 or LT) ( ×3).  Make sure that the spring [B] of end fence [A] is attached Remove the left tray side fence (front) [A] and left tray side fence (rear) [B] ( ×2). D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-42...
  • Page 113 LCIT PB3170/ PB3230 Attach the fences to the required position (A4 or LT) ( ×2). Set the paper size setting.  SP5-181-009 (0: A4 LEF or 1: LT LEF) 2-43 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 114: Accessory Check

    When installing this option, turn the power of the machine off, and unplug the power plug from the wall socket.  If this option is installed when the power is on, it will result in an electric shock or a malfunction. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-44...
  • Page 115 Attach the joint pins [A] to the front and rear on the right of the paper feed unit. Attach the brackets [A], [B] at the positions of the joint pins ( ×4). Remove the rear lower gap cover [A] ( 2-45 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 116 Take off the securing brackets [A] from the two positions on the left and right at the rear of the machine ( : 1 each). Remove the paper feed unit rear cover [A] ( ×2). Connect the harness [A] ( x2). For the machine with Paper Feed Unit PB3170/ PB3230 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-46...
  • Page 117 LCIT RT3030 For the machine with Paper Feed Unit PB3210/ PB3220 10. Clamp the harness (PB3170/ PB3230: ×9, PB3210/ PB3220: ×5). For the machine with Paper Feed Unit PB3170/ PB3230 2-47 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 118 For the machine with Paper Feed Unit PB3210/ PB3220 11. Attach the paper feed unit rear cover. 12. Attach the rear lower gap cover [A] ( x2). 13. Attach the hook of the side LCT to the bracket. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-48...
  • Page 119 15. Attach the cable cover [A] ( ×1). 16. Push the side LCT towards the machine. 17. Turn the power switch ON. 18. Set the paper, and check that the paper size set in the paper feed tray is displayed on the control unit. 2-49 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 120: Changing The Paper Size

    Remove the upper screw at the front side fence, and after setting the side fence to the position of the paper (outer: A4 LEF, center: LT LEF, inner: B5 LEF), tighten the screw that was removed. Also change the rear side fence to the same size position. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-50...
  • Page 121 LCIT RT3030 Change the paper size according to the new side fence position. SP5-181-024 (Size Adjust LCT) 0: A4 LEF, 1: LT LEF, 2: B5 LEF 2-51 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 122: Caster Table Type M3

    If this option is installed when the power is on, it will result in an electric shock or malfunction.  Be sure to join the machine and caster table to prevent equipment from falling over.  If it is not joined, the machine will move or fall over, which will result in an injury. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-52...

  • Page 123: For Installing Directly Under The Main Machine

    Using a securing bracket, fix the machine or paper feed unit to the caster table (spring washer : screw: M4×10: 1). Attach the securing brackets [A] at 2 positions to left and right at the rear of the machine or paper feed unit (screws: 1 each). 2-53 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 124: For Installing Under Pb3150

    Install the securing bracket [A] at the rear of the PB3150 ( ×2) Put back the tray of the PB3150 in place. By holding the grips on the main machine, mount the main machine on the PB3150 while fitting the locating pins. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-54...
  • Page 125 Secure the main machine and PB3150 (M4×10: ×1). 10. Attach the securing bracket [A] to the rear of the main machine ( ×2). 11. Attach the rear lower gap cover [A] ( ×2). 12. Return the 2nd paper feed tray to the main machine. 2-55 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 126: Platen Cover Pn2000 (D700)

    2.8 PLATEN COVER PN2000 (D700) 2.8.1 ACCESSORY CHECK Description Q’ty Feeler Guide Stepped Screw 2.8.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE  Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure. Install the stepped screws ( × 2). Install the feeler guide [A]. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-56...
  • Page 127 Platen Cover PN2000 (D700) Install the platen cover [A]. Place the platen sheet [A] on the exposure glass. Line up the rear left corner of the platen sheet flush against corner [B] on the exposure glass. 2-57 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 128 Press the surface of the platen sheet gently to fix it on the platen cover securely. Connect the power cord and turn on the main power. 10. Place an original on the platen and make a copy to check the installation. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-58...

  • Page 129: Ardf Df3090

    Attention Decal - Top Cover 2.9.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE  Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure. Remove all tapes and shipping retainers. Insert the two stud screws ([A] is the larger stud, [B] is the smaller stud). 2-59 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 130 Slide the ARDF toward the front of the machine. Secure the ARDF with the two knob screws [C]. Align the rear left corner of the platen sheet [A] with the corner [B] on the exposure glass. Close the ARDF. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-60...
  • Page 131 Lift the ARDF original tray. 10. Slide the stamp holder [A] out and install the stamp cartridge in it, if necessary.  After the stamp installation, be sure to slide the holder in correctly. If not, jam detection (J001) will occur. 2-61 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 132 ARDF DF3090 11. Attach the decals [A] [B] to the top cover as shown. Choose the language that you want. 12. Remove the scanner rear cover [A] ( ×3). 13. Connect the harness to the SIO (CN315) [A]. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-62...

  • Page 133: When Feeding Thin Paper

    When feeding thin paper, adjust the sliding tray to the point shown below [A]. When feeding normal paper, adjust the sliding tray to the point shown below [B]. If not, it may cause problems as follows:  Original jam  Original curl  Originals cannot be stacked neatly 2-63 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 134 ARDF DF3090 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-64...

  • Page 135: Spdf Df3080

    Sub IPU Bracket Not used for this model Ferrite Core: K3 NF-75(N)BK0 Ferrite Core: K3 NF-70-A(N)BK0 Clamp: LWS-0711A Use eight screws for this Tapping Screw: M3×6 model BCU Board Not used for this model IPU-sub Board Spacer Serial Number Decal 2-65 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 136: Installation Procedure

    Remove the items in the package (boards, fixing screws, etc.). Attach the two stepped screws to the machine.  The larger-stepped screw [A] is for the right side and the smaller-stepped screw [B] is for the left side of the main machine. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-66...
  • Page 137 Align the hinges of the SPDF [A] with the hole [B] for stepped screws, and attach them by sliding them in. Fix the SPDF to the machine (coin screws [C] ×2). Place the platen sheet [A] on the exposure glass. Align the platen sheet with the left-rear scale [B] of the machine. 2-67 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 138: Attaching The Sub Ipu

    10. Paste the decal (SET:ORIGINAL TABLE) to the point [B] as shown in the following picture.  This decal must be pasted without projecting over the gap in the original table. Attaching the Sub IPU Remove the scanner rear cover [A] ( ×3). Remove the controller cover [A] ( ×4). D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-68...
  • Page 139 SPDF DF3080 Remove the controller rear cover [A] ( ×5). Remove the rear left cover [A] ( ×3). Disconnect the scanner cable [A] and SIO harness [B] from the IPU board. 2-69 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 140 Connect CN593 [A] on the IPU-sub board [C] with CN529 [B] on the IPU board to attach the IPU-sub board ( x3). Attach the DF cable bracket [A] on the scanner rear frame ( x1). Attach the ground wire [B] ( x1). 10. Attach the DF harness [C] to CN312 on the SIO. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-70...
  • Page 141 14. Attach the scanner cable [B] to CN590 on the IPU-sub board ( x1), CIS cable [C] to CN592 on the IPU-sub board ( x1), and the SIO harness [D] to CN531 on the IPU board ( x1). 2-71 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 142 Ferrite core: K3 NF-75 (N) BK0 is for the CIS cable. 16. Remove the scanner cable gap cover from the scanner rear cover.  DF cable gap [A], CIS cable gap [B] 17. Reassemble the machine. 18. Attach the decals: “Original” [A] and “Original table set” [B]. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-72...

  • Page 143: Adjust Sp Settings

    SP6-006-002: ADF Adjustment Side-to-Side Regist: Rear If there is skew, loosen the fixing screw [A] and swivel the SPDF slightly to the left or right. Then tighten coin screw [A] and make a test copy to check that there is no skew. 2-73 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 144: Bridge Unit Bu3070

    When installing this option, turn the power of the machine off, and unplug the power plug from the wall socket.  If this option is installed when the power is on, it will result in an electric shock or a malfunction. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-74...
  • Page 145 To use together with the “1 Bin Tray BN3110”, attach the “1 Bin Tray BN3110” first before installing the bridge unit. Remove the orange tape and shipping retainers. Remove the enclosed items (fixing screws, etc.). Remove the paper exit tray [A]. Remove the connector cover [A]. 2-75 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 146 The main power switch cover has three tabs: two on the left side (paper exit) and one on the right side (right cover). Attach the bracket [A] ( ×1). 10. Attach the main power switch cover, and close the right cover. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-76...
  • Page 147 14. Referring to the finisher's installation procedure, attach the L type connecting bracket [A], but do not tighten the screws yet. 15. After the finisher is installed, turn the main power switch ON. 16. Check that the finisher can be selected at the operation panel. 2-77 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 148: Bin Tray Bn3110

    If this option is installed with the power on, it will result in an electric shock or a malfunction.  If you install this option together with “Bridge Unit BU3070”, “Internal Shift Tray SH3070” or “Side Tray Type M3”, install this option first. Remove the orange tapes and shipping retainers. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-78...
  • Page 149 The main power switch cover has three tabs: two on the left side (paper exit) and one on the right side (right cover). Remove the Paper exit tray [A]. Open the front cover. Remove the left upper cover [A] ( ×1). 2-79 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 150 1 Bin Tray BN3110 Remove the controller cover [A] ( ×4). Remove the left rear cover [A] ( ×2). 10. Remove the inverter tray [A] and tray support rod cover [B] ( ×1). D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-80...
  • Page 151 12. Attach the gear [A] provided with this option. 13. Attach the 1 bin tray unit [A] ( ×1, ×2).  Take care that the harness is not trapped between the 1 bin tray unit and the machine frame. 2-81 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 152 Slowly and carefully lift up the harness cover to remove. Removing the harness cover while moving it round can break the harness because the inner hook catches the harness. 15. Attach the harness removed in the previous step. 16. Attach the tray support bar [A] ( ×1). D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-82...
  • Page 153 Pass the harness attached in the previous step through the position in the blue circle. 17. Hook the 1 bin tray [A] onto the 1 bin tray unit, aligning the positions in the blue circles. 18. Connect the harness to the 1 bin tray, and bring it around ( ×1). 2-83 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 154 20. Attach the left rear cover, left upper cover and main power switch cover, and then close the right cover. 21. Turn the main power switch ON. 22. Check that output to this tray can be selected on the operation panel, and check operation. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-84...

  • Page 155: Internal Shift Tray Sh3070

    Finisher SR3130”, or “Internal Finisher SR3180”.  For using this option together with “1 Bin Tray BN3110”, attach the bottom plate of this option at the beginning, then install the “1 Bin Tray BN3110”, followed by installing this option. 2-85 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 156 Internal Shift Tray SH3070 Remove the filament tape and packing material. Remove the enclosed items. Attach the tray cover [B] to the shift tray [A]. Remove the paper exit tray [A]. Remove the connector cover [A]. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-86...
  • Page 157 Remove the main power switch cover [A] ( ×1).  The main power switch cover has three tabs: two on the left side (paper exit) and one on the right side (right cover). Remove the paper exit cover [A] ( ×1). 2-87 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 158 Internal Shift Tray SH3070 10. Remove the feeler [A]. 11. Attach the shift tray feeler [A]. 12. Attach the sheets [A] at the edge of the paper exit cover. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-88...
  • Page 159 13. Attach the paper exit cover and main power switch cover, and then close the right cover. 14. Turn the main power switch ON. 15. Check that paper output to the shift tray can be selected at the operation panel, and check the operation. 2-89 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 160: Side Tray Type M3

    Side Tray Type M3 2.14 SIDE TRAY TYPE M3 2.14.1 ACCESSORY CHECK Description Q’ty Left Extension Tray Upper Extension Tray Fixing Plate Knob Screw Tapping screw - M4 x 14 Tapping screw - M3 x 8 Bracket D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-90...

  • Page 161: Installation Procedure

    Remove the paper exit tray [A]. Open the right cover. Remove the main power switch cover [A] ( ×1).  The main power switch cover has three tabs: two on the left side (paper exit) and one on the right side (right cover). 2-91 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 162 ×1). Attach the main power switch cover, and then close the right cover. Attach the side tray unit [A] to the machine, and fix with a knob screw ( ×1). 10. Attach the fixing plate [A] ( ×1). D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-92...
  • Page 163 11. Attach the upper extension tray [A] and the left extension tray [B]. 12. Turn the main power switch ON. 13. Check that paper output of the side tray can be selected at the operation panel, and check the operation. 2-93 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 164: Booklet Finisher Sr3170 / Finisher Sr3160

    Note Guide Plate Shift Tray Ground Plate Screws: M4x12 Rivets Cushion Booklet Tray D688 only Joint Bracket D688: 2 Tapping Screw: M3x8 D689: 1 Tapping Screw: M3x6 Tray Holder Hopper Cover D688 only Proof Support Tray EMC Address D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-94...

  • Page 165: Installation Procedure

    If this option is installed when the power is on, it will result in an electric shock or a malfunction.  Before installing this option, attach the “Bridge Unit BU3070” first.  Attach the “LCIT PB3170/ PB3230” or “Paper Feed Unit PB3210/ PB3220” first before installing this option. 2-95 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 166 Open the front cover [A], and remove the orange tapes, shipping retainers and fixing bracket [B] (  Additional Step only for D688: Pull out the saddle stitch unit [A] to remove the orange tapes, shipping retainer and fixing bracket [B] attached on the bottom frame x1). D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-96...
  • Page 167 Clean the right side of the upper cover with an alcohol cloth, and then attach the cushion to the finisher.  Make sure that the cushion is aligned with the rear-lower edge [A] of the upper cover. Attach the shift tray [A] ( ×1). 2-97 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 168 At this time, tighten the bracket [A] and the bridge unit bracket [B] together.  As the default setting, the screw head is placed at the center of the scale of the rear side.  The joint bracket [A] must be placed under the bridge unit bracket [B]. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-98...
  • Page 169 [B] to the rear (left) position [C] so that the adjusting bracket can be adjusted horizontally. 11. Open the front cover. 12. Connect the finisher to the machine with the lock lever [A] ( ×1). 2-99 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 170 14. Set the stapler [A]. 15. Close the front cover. 16. Attach the tray holder ( x2). 17. Turn the main power switch on. 18. Check that the finisher can be selected on the operation panel, and check the finisher’s operation. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-100...

  • Page 171: Adjustment After Installing The Finisher

    If the paper edge is lined up with any marking to the right of center, this means the paper is shifted toward the front.  If the paper edge is lined up with any marking to the left of center, this means the paper is shifted toward the rear. 2-101 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 172: Auxiliary Tray

    The trays are designed to prevent this problem. Proof Support Tray Install the proof support tray [A] on the proof tray when the trailing edges of paper are excessively curled. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-102...

  • Page 173: Accessory Check

    Punch Unit PU3060 2.16 PUNCH UNIT PU3060 2.16.1 ACCESSORY CHECK Description Q’ty Hopper Punch Unit Registration Guide Plate Registration Mobile Unit Paper Chip Guide Punch Unit Stay Punch Stepping Motor Unit Clip Ring Tapping Screw- M3×6 Hopper Bracket 2-103 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 174: Installation Procedure

    This option is only for Booklet Finisher SR3170 / Finisher SR3160. Remove the rear upper cover [A] ( ×2). Remove the rear lower cover [A] ( ×2). Remove the inner cover [A] ( ×3, ×1).  There is a connector on the back of the inner cover. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-104...
  • Page 175 Punch Unit PU3060 Remove the punch guide plate [A] ( ×1). Attach the punch unit stay [A] ( ×4). Rear-----------------------------------------------Front 2-105 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 176 [C]. Attach the hopper bracket [A], inserting from the outside frame of the finisher ( ×2, 2 hooks).  Hook the hooks of the hopper bracket onto the back side of the frame. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-106...
  • Page 177 Punch Unit PU3060  Hook the upper frame of the hopper bracket onto the outside frame of the finisher. 2-107 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 178 Punch Unit PU3060 Connect the harness of the hopper sensor ( ×1). Attach the registration guide plate [A] ( ×2). 10. Attach the registration mobile unit [A] ( ×2). D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-108...
  • Page 179 Insert the front pins of the registration mobile unit into the holes of the frame. 11. Attach the punch unit [A] ( ×2).  After inserting the pins [B] of the punch unit stay [A] into the front and rear holes of the punch unit, fix the punch unit with two screws. 2-109 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 180 Punch Unit PU3060  Rear  Front 12. Attach the punch stepping motor unit [A] ( ×2). D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-110...
  • Page 181 Engage the gear [B] of the punch stepping motor unit with the rack [C] of the punch unit. 13. Connect the harness of the hopper sensor to the connector of the finisher. 14. Connect the harness of the punch unit to the connector of the registration drive unit. 2-111 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 182 16. Connect the harness [B] of the punch stepping motor unit and the harness [C] of the registration mobile unit to the connector of the punch unit board [A]. 17. Clamp all the harnesses of the punch unit PU3060 ( ×8). D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-112...
  • Page 183 Punch Unit PU3060 18. Attach the hopper [A]. 19. Attach the rear upper cover, the rear lower cover, the inner cover, and the punch guide plate. 2-113 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 184: Booklet Finisher Sr3150 / Finisher Sr3140

    Description Q’ty Remarks Booklet Tray SR3150 only Relay Guide Plate Not used Ground Plate Bracket Screws: M4×12 Not used Tapping screws: M3×6 Tapping screw : M4×8 Shift Tray Connecting Bracket Stabilizer SR3140 only Cushion Not used EMC Address D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-114...

  • Page 185: Installation Procedure

    Before installing this option, attach the “Bridge Unit BU3050” first.  Attach the “LCIT PB3170/ PB3230” or “Paper Feed Unit PB3210/ PB3220” first before installing this option. For SR3140 only, install the stabilizer [A] ( ×1). Remove the external orange tape and shipping retainers. 2-115 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 186 Pull out the booklet stitching unit [A] or stapling unit, and remove the filament tape and packing materials. Wipe the surface of the top cover with alcohol, and then attach the cushion [A] (supplied with the finisher adapter) to the top cover. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-116...
  • Page 187 There are two screw holes at each edge of the frame. Use the screw holes which are the front side on each edge when attaching the relay guide plate [A]. 10. Attach the ground plate bracket [A] ( x2; M3 x 6). 2-117 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 188: Sr3150

    Make sure that the screw head is placed at the center of the scale as shown by the blue arrow below. When adjusting registration, reattach the adjusting bracket [A], so that the inscribed line turns upside down. The screw is to be secured with the elongated screw slot. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-118...
  • Page 189 12. Connect the finisher to the machine with the lock lever [A] ( x1). 13. Connect the interface cable to the machine. 14. Turn the main power switch on. 15. Check that the finisher can be selected on the operation panel, and check the finisher’s operation. 2-119 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 190: Adjustment After Installing Finisher

    If the paper edge is lined up with any marking to the right of center, this means the paper is shifted toward the front.  If the paper edge is lined up with any marking to the left of center, this means the paper is shifted toward the rear. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-120...

  • Page 191: Punch Unit Pu3050

    Punch Unit PU3050 2.18 PUNCH UNIT PU3050 2.18.1 COMPONENT CHECK Description Q’ty Punch unit Registration Sensor unit Registration Guide Plate Hopper Guide Plate Punch Unit Stay Hopper Punch Drive Motor Harness: punch: main Tapping screws: M3x6 2-121 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 192: Installation Procedure

    Unpack the box, and remove the filament tape and packing material. Pull out the finisher interface cable, and move it away from the machine. Remove the finisher rear cover [A] ( x2). Open the finisher front cover [A]. Remove the three knobs [A] ( x1). D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-122...
  • Page 193 Remove the knobs with the lock mechanism using a knob screwdriver or similar tool while releasing the lock. Remove three screws of the finisher inner cover [A] ( x3). Pull out the booklet stitching unit [A] a little. Remove the inner cover [A] ( x1). 2-123 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 194 Open the upper cover [A] and remove the arm of the guide plate [B] from the finisher upper cover ( x1). 10. Remove the guide plate [A] ( x4).  The removed guide plate is not used. Please check with the customer when you discard it. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-124...
  • Page 195 11. Insert the hopper guide plate [A] from the front. 12. Secure the hopper guide plate [A] ( x1). 13. Insert the punch unit stay [A] from the front.  Set the shaft [B] of the punch unit stay in the U-shaped gutter [A]. 2-125 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 196 14. Secure the punch unit stay [A] ( x3). 15. Insert the registration guide plate [A] from the rear. 16. Secure the registration guide plate [A] ( x2). 17. Insert the registration sensor unit [A] from the rear. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-126...
  • Page 197 Insert the shafts [C] of the registration sensor unit [B] into the bearings [A]. 18. Secure the registration sensor unit [A] ( x2). 19. Connect the hopper guide plate harness [A] to the registration sensor unit relay connector [B] ( x1). 2-127 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 198 Punch Unit PU3050 20. Insert the punch unit [A] from the rear.  The bracket [A] must be in the right position as shown when inserting. 21. Secure the punch unit [A] ( x2). D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-128...
  • Page 199 Put the shaft of the stay [A] through the hole of the motor bracket [B].  Make sure that the rack of the punch unit [A] and the pinion of the bracket [B] are correctly engaged with each other. 2-129 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 200 24. Connect the harness [B], provided as an accessory, to the main board of the punch unit [A] ( x3). 25. Connect the harness [B] provided as an accessory, to the main board [A] of the finisher x3). D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-130...
  • Page 201 26. Connect the harness [B], provided as an accessory, to the harness of the registration sensor unit [A] ( x1). 27. Remove the harness [A] from the clamp [B], and connect it to the main board of the punch unit [C] ( x1). 2-131 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 202 28. Connect the harness of the punch drive motor [A] to the main board [B] of the punch unit. 29. Clamp the harnesses ( x4). 30. Insert the hopper [A]. 31. Cut off the part [A] of the finisher inner cover, then attach the inner cover [B] ( x1). D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-132...
  • Page 203 37. Attach the finisher to the machine, and connect the interface cable. 38. Connect the power cord of the machine, and turn the main power on. 39. Check that the punch can be selected at the operation panel, and check the operation. 2-133 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 204 2.19 INTERNAL FINISHER SR3180 2.19.1 ACCESSORY CHECK Description Q’ty Bottom Plate Left Lower Cover Paper Output Tray Tapping Screw: M3X8 Tapping Screw: M3X8 Tapping Screw: M3X8 Screw: M3X6 Tapping Screw: M3X6 Tapping Screw: M4X8 Slide Rail Nylon Clamp D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-134...

  • Page 205: Internal Finisher Sr3180

    “1 Bin Tray BN3110”, followed by installing this option. Remove the orange tape and shipping retainers. Remove the screw [A] securing the unit ( x 1). Remove the shaft [B] from the slide rail [A] ( x 1). 2-135 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 206 Remove the paper output cover [A] ( x 2). Place the slide rail [A] under the internal finisher [B]. Insert the shaft [A] into the holes located in the slide rail and internal finisher, and then fasten with the screw ( x 1). D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-136...
  • Page 207 Internal Finisher SR3180 Attach the paper output cover (removed in step 4) [A] ( x 2). Remove the Paper exit tray [A]. Open the front cover. 10. Remove the left upper cover [A] ( x 1). 2-137 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 208 14. Remove the main power switch cover [A] ( x 1).  The main power switch cover has three tabs: two on the left side (paper exit) and one on the right side (right cover). 15. Remove the paper exit cover [A] ( x 1). D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-138...
  • Page 209 The lower inside cover can be removed together with the paper exit lower cover, since the inside cover is secured on the paper exit lower cover with two screws. 18. Remove the lower inside cover [B] from the paper exit lower cover [A] ( x 2). 2-139 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 210 19. While pressing the bottom plate [A] into the area [B] shown by the red-dashed line, insert the tabs of the bottom plate into the slots [C] [D] shown by the blue circles. 20. Secure the bottom plate [A] ( x 3, Accessory No. 7). D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-140...
  • Page 211 No.5). 21. Attach the paper exit cover [A] and the connector cover [B] (removed in step 15 and step 16). 22. Attach the main power switch cover [A], and then close right cover. 23. Attach the finisher [B]. 2-141 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 212 25. Attach the left upper cover [A] and the left rear cover [B] (removed in step 10 and step 11). 26. Attach the left lower cover [A] ( x 2, Accessory No.6). 27. Attach the paper output tray [A] ( x 2, Accessory No.4). D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-142...
  • Page 213 Internal Finisher SR3180 28. Reattach the Inverter tray [A] removed in step 12. 29. Remove the connector cover [A] ( 2-143 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 214: Staple Setting As An Initial Setting

    There also is a setting to mask the image on the point for staple, in order to avoid the strength of crimp to be weakened.  Depending on users demands, explain the settings/ methods of the settings by checking the following instruction. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-144...
  • Page 215 <How to change the setting of Staple Method (Single/ Double) for Stapleless Stapler> [User Mode/ counter] [System Setting] [General Setting] and [next] [Stapling Method for Stapleless Stapler] <How to set Margin Erase for Stapleless Stapler> [User Mode/ counter] [System Setting] [General Setting ] and [next] [Erase Margin for Stapleless Stapler] 2-145 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 216 When you install this option, turn off the power to the machine, and unplug the power plug from the wall socket.  If this option is installed with the power on, it will result in an electric shock or a malfunction. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-146...

  • Page 217: Internal Finisher Sr3130

    To use together with the “Punch Unit PU3040”, first attach the “Punch Unit PU3040” before installing this option. Remove the orange tape and shipping retainers. Remove the package items (fixing screws, etc.). Open the front cover. Remove the paper exit tray [A]. Remove the left upper cover [A] ( ×1). 2-147 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 218 Remove the main power switch cover [A] ( ×1).  The main power switch cover has three tabs: two on the left side (paper exit) and one on the right side (right cover). 10. Remove the paper exit cover [A] ( ×1). D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-148...
  • Page 219 12. Remove the paper exit lower cover [A] ( ×2).  After removing the screws, slide the paper exit lower cover toward the left side, then pull the cover up.  Install a screw [A] removed in step 12. 2-149 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 220 1) Slip the bottom plate [A] into the position [B]. 2) Insert the bottom plate [A] into the hole in the blue circle [C]. 3) When the bottom plate [A] is picked up (see below), it can be inserted into the hole in the blue circle [D]. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-150...
  • Page 221 Unit PU3040 is to be installed, refer to the Step 3 and later of the installation procedure (page 2-155). 16. Attach the main power switch cover and close the right cover ( ×1). 17. Slide the finisher front right cover [A] from left to right, and then attach it ( ×1). 2-151 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 222 The entrance guide plate has one or more tabs underneath. Fit the tabs when fastening the entrance guide plate. 20. Keep the paper exit feeler [A] in the cover.  If this step is not done, the feeler may be damaged when closing the finisher from left to right. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-152...
  • Page 223 22. Attach the left rear cover to the machine ( ×2). 23. Insert the left upper cover [A] provided with this option from the front, and then attach it ( x1). 2-153 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 224 26. Open the stapler unit [A], and then set the staple cartridge [B]. 27. Turn the power switch on. 28. Check that the finisher can be selected at the operation panel, and check the finisher operation. In addition, when punch unit is installed, check the punching operation. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-154...

  • Page 225: Accessory Check

    Punch Unit PU3040 2.21 PUNCH UNIT PU3040 2.21.1 ACCESSORY CHECK Description Q’ty Hopper Punch Unit Cover Lower Front Cover Lower Rear Cover Holder Knob Screw - M4 Tapping screws: M3x6 Decal - EMC Address 2-155 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 226: Installation Procedure

    Perform steps 1 to 15 of the installation procedure for the "Internal finisher SR3130". Change the position of the bracket [A] on the bottom plate ( ×1). Replace the lock holder of the bottom plate with the lock holder [A] provided ( ×1). Fasten the bottom plate with screws ( ×3). D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-156...
  • Page 227 Punch Unit PU3040 Attach the main power switch cover. Pass the shafts [B] of the punch unit [A] through the bearings [C] of the bottom plate, and attach the punch unit to the machine ( ×1, knob screw). 2-157 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 228 Attach the front right cover [A] provided, inserting the claws ( ×2). Insert the hopper [A]. 10. Slide the finisher [A] along the rail of the bottom plate from the left of the machine, and then attach it ( ×1). D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-158...
  • Page 229 Note that this step is unnecessary when installing the finisher and punch unit at the same time. 11. Attach the lower rear cover [A] and lower front cover [B] to the finisher ( ×2). 12. Attach the left rear cover to the machine. 2-159 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 230 13. Insert the upper left cover [A] from the front, and then attach it ( x1). 14. Connect the interface cable to the machine. 15. Turn the main power switch on. 16. Check that the finisher can be selected at the operation panel, and check the finisher and punch operation. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-160...

  • Page 231: Installation Procedure

    Release these tabs after removing the two screws of the scanner front cover. First, carefully and slightly pull the left side of the cover towards the outside and release the left side tab, then pull up the right upper side tab and release it. 2-161 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 232 Smart Operation Panel Type M3 Remove the operation panel upper cover [A] (hooks). Remove the standard operation panel [A] ( ×5, ×2). D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-162...
  • Page 233 Attach the brand logo to the place [A] on the smart operation panel if necessary. Attach the Smart Operation Panel Type M3 [A] ( ×5, ×3, ×2). Attach the operation panel upper cover [A] (hook×2). 10. Attach the scanner front cover. 11. Turn the main power ON. 2-163 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 234 ⇒ 17. Select package file and update controller soft version. ⇒ 18. Turn the main switch off-on, check to see if the updating is done in user tool (User tool > system Setting > Administrator Setting >Firmware Version). D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-164...

  • Page 235: Anti-Condensation Heater Type M12

    Turn off the main power and disconnect the power supply cord when installing this option. 2.23.1 ACCESSORY CHECK Description Q’ty Tapping Screw: M3x6 Clamp: LWSM-0306A Clamp: LWSM-0511A Clamp: LWS-1211A Heater Board BCU Harness PSU Harness Scanner/ PCU Harness Thermostat unit 2-165 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 236: Installation Procedure

    Anti-Condensation Heater Type M12 2.23.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Anti-Condensation Heater (Scanner) Open the front cover [A]. Remove the paper exit tray [A]. Remove the left upper cover [A] ( ×1).  Slide the cover in the direction of the blue arrow. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-166...
  • Page 237 Anti-Condensation Heater Type M12 Remove the controller cover [A] ( ×4). Open the 1st and 2nd paper feed trays slightly. 2-167 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 238 Anti-Condensation Heater Type M12 Remove the left cover [A] ( ×5). Remove it while pressing down. Remove the scanner rear cover [A] ( ×3). Remove the controller rear cover [A] ( ×4). D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-168...
  • Page 239 Anti-Condensation Heater Type M12 Remove the rear lower gap cover [A] (hook×2). 10. Remove the rear lower cover [A] ( ×5). 11. Remove the rear left cover ( ×3). 2-169 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 240 12. Remove the rear right cover [A] ( ×5). 13. Attach the heater board [A] ( x3). 14. Connect the harness [A] to CN904 of the PSU and CN920 of the heater board. 15. Clamp the harness which is connected in step 14 ( ×6). D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-170...
  • Page 241 16. Connect the harness [A] to CN121 of the BCU and CN930 of the heater board. 17. Clamp the harness [A] which is connected in step 16 ( ×7). 18. Connect the heater cable [A] to CN922 of the heater board [B]. 2-171 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 242 Anti-Condensation Heater Type M12 19. Route the heater cable to the rear of the main unit ( ×6). 20. Open the platen cover or ADF. 21. Remove the guide scale [A] ( ×3). 22. Remove the ADF exposure glass [A]. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-172...
  • Page 243 24. Remove the left scale and exposure glass [A].  The exposure glass and the left scale are attached with double-sided tape. 25. Move the carriage to the center. 26. Attach the bracket [A] to the left side of the scanner. 2-173 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 244 28. Route the harness on the hook which is indicated with the blue circle in the picture below. 29. Pass the harness out through the hole of the frame. 30. Remove the screw of the cable guide [A]. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-174...
  • Page 245 Secure the screw in the same position as step 30. 32. Remove the DF harness with the bracket [A] if the DF is installed ( x1). 33. Remove the SIO board [A] if the DF is installed ( x6, flat cable x1). 2-175 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 246: Anti-Condensation Heater (Pcu)

    19. 35. Attach all covers which have been removed. Anti-Condensation Heater (PCU) Open the front cover. Open the right cover. Open the transfer unit [A]. PCDU [A] ( Pull out the waste toner bottle [A] ( x1). D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-176...
  • Page 247 Fit the anti-condensation heater (PCU) [A] into the tab [C] on the heater bracket [B]. Attach the thermostat [A] to the Anti-condensation heater (PCU) [B] ( x1).  Fit the thermostat [A] into the tab [C] on the heater bracket [B]. 2-177 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 248 Put back the anti-condensation heater (PCU) [A], and then pass the heater harnesses out through the opening [B] at the inner rear side of the main unit. 10. For D200/D201/D202 only, remove the development bearing cooling fan [A] ( x1). D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-178...
  • Page 249 [B] to the harnesses [C] which is routed in step 19 of the procedure for the Anti-Condensation Heater (Scanner).  You can connect the harnesses [C] up to either the harness [A] or [B]. 12. Reattach the development bearing cooling fan, PCDU, waste toner bottle and covers which have been removed. 2-179 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 250: Anti-Condensation Heater For Trays

    Anti-Condensation Heater (Service Option) for Main Unit Description Q’ty Tapping Screw: M3x6 Clamp: LWSM-0306A Clamp: LWS-1211A Heater Board BCU Harness PSU Harness PFU Harness Anti-Condensation Heater (Service Option) for Optional PFU and LCIT Description Q’ty PFU Harness Heater Board Clamp: LWSM-0306A Screw: M4x10 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-180...

  • Page 251: Installation Procedure

    Turn off the main power and disconnect the power supply cord. Open the front cover. Remove the paper exit tray [A]. Remove the left upper cover [A] ( ×1).  Slide the cover in the direction of the blue arrow. 2-181 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 252 Anti-Condensation Heater for Trays Remove the controller cover [A] ( ×4). Open the 1st and 2nd paper feed trays slightly. Remove the left cover [A] ( ×5). Remove it while pressing down. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-182...
  • Page 253 Anti-Condensation Heater for Trays Remove the controller rear cover [A] ( ×4). Remove the rear lower gap cover [A] (hook×2). 10. Remove the rear lower cover [A] ( ×5). 2-183 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 254 Anti-Condensation Heater for Trays 11. Attach the heater board [A] ( x3). 12. Connect the harness [A] to CN904 of the PSU and CN920 of the heater board. 13. Clamp the harness which is connected in step 5 ( x6). D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-184...
  • Page 255 Anti-Condensation Heater for Trays 14. Connect the harness [A] to CN121 of the BCU and CN930 of the heater board. 15. Clamp the harness [A] which is connected in step 7 ( x7). 2-185 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 256 16. Connect the heater harness [A] to CN921 of the heater board, and then attach the plug-in of the heater harness to the rear frame of the main unit. 17. Clamp the heater harness which is routed in step 9 ( x3). 18. Pull out the first and second paper feed trays. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-186...
  • Page 257 Manually disconnect the PCU and scanner heaters.  The PCU and scanner heaters must be disabled because the temperature in the machine could become too high, causing problems with toner clogging, or damage to the scanner lamp stabilizer. 2-187 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 258: Anti-Condensation Heater For Paper Feed Unit Pb3210 / Pb3220

    ( x1). Remove the securing brackets [A] of the optional paper feed unit ( x2). Remove the rear cover [A] of the optional paper feed unit ( x2). D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-188...
  • Page 259 Connect the power supply cord and turn ON the main power. Do the following two steps to set the anti-condensation heater to be constantly ON. Set the setting of SP5-805-001 (Anti-Condensation Heater ON/OFF setting) to [1]. Manually disconnect the PCU and scanner heaters. 2-189 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 260: Anti-Condensation Heater For Paper Feed Unit Pb3150

    Put the harness of the heater [A] for the optional paper feed unit through the hole at the inner rear frame, and then attach it ( x1). Remove the securing brackets [A] of Paper Feed Unit PB3150 ( x2). Remove the rear cover [A] of Paper Feed Unit PB3150 ( x4). D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-190...
  • Page 261 Connect the power supply code and turn ON the main power. Do the following two steps to set the anti-condensation heater to be constantly ON. Set the setting of SP5-805-001 (Anti-Condensation Heater ON/OFF setting) to [1]. Manually disconnect the PCU and scanner heaters. 2-191 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 262: Anti-Condensation Heater For Lcit Pb3170/ Pb3230

    Pass the harness of the heater [A] for the optional tray out through the hole in the inner rear frame of the optional LCT unit, and then attach it ( x1). Remove the securing brackets [A] of the optional LCT unit ( x2). Remove the rear cover [A] of the optional LCT unit ( x2). D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-192...
  • Page 263 Connect the power supply cord and turn ON the main power. Do the following two steps to set the anti-condensation heater to be constantly ON. Set the setting of SP5-805-001 (Anti-Condensation Heater ON/OFF setting) to [1]. Manually disconnect the PCU and scanner heaters. 2-193 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 264 Anti-Condensation Heater for Trays  The PCU and scanner heaters must be disabled because the temperature in the machine could become too high, causing problems with toner clogging, or damage to the scanner lamp stabilizer. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-194...

  • Page 265: Accessory Check

    2.25 CARD READER BRACKET TYPE 3352 2.25.1 ACCESSORY CHECK Description Q'ty For This Model Screw: M3 x 8 Screw: M3 x 14 Not used Screw: M4 x 25 Tapping Screw: M3 x 10 Upper Tray Lower Tray Tray Bracket Clamp 2-195 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 266: Installation Procedure

    Remove the scanner right cover [A] ( ×1) Make two screw holes in the removed scanner right cover with a screwdriver or drill.  Make the screw hole to be smaller than the screw size. Reattach the scanner right cover ( x2). D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-196...
  • Page 267 Attach the lower tray [A] to the tray bracket ( x2: M3 x 8). Attach the upper tray [B] to the tray bracket ( x1: M3 x 10). Attach the clamps ([1] to [5]) and route the harness around the machine as shown. 2-197 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 268: Scanner Right Cover

    Card Reader Bracket Type 3352 Scanner Right Cover Upper Rear Cover Clamp the USB cable and connect it to the USB connector. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-198...

  • Page 269: Key Counter Bracket Type M3

    Secure the key counter holder to the bracket ( x2). Install the key counter cover [D] ( x2). Attach the harness that comes from the key counter to the right side of the main machine with the two clamps provided (CLAMP:LWS-1211Z). 2-199 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 270 Key Counter Bracket Type M3 Remove the controller cover [A] ( ×4). Remove the controller rear cover [A] ( ×5). Remove the rear left cover ( ×3). D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-200...
  • Page 271 Remove the rear lower cover [A] ( ×5). 10. Remove the connector on CN133 [A] of the BCU, and then connect the key counter harness to CN133. 11. Secure the harness to the inside of the main frame with a clamp. 2-201 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 272 13. Pass the harness from the key counter through the cut off part [A] of the right rear cover. 14. Reinstall all the covers on the main machine. 15. Peel off double sided tape on the key counter bracket and attach the key counter to the scanner right cover. 16. Reassemble the machine. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-202...

  • Page 273: Optional Counter Interface Unit Type M12

    Stud Harness Clamp: LWS-0711 EMC Address Decal Harness 2.27.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Exterior Covers (page 4-9)  Controller Cover  Controller Rear Cover  Rear Lower Cover Install the four stud stays in the location [A] as shown below. 2-203 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 274 Install the optional counter interface board [A] on the four stud stays. Connect the supplied harness (13 pins) to CN3 [A] on the optional counter interface board and CN132 [A] on the BCU. Route the harness [A] and clamp it as shown below ( x1). D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-204...
  • Page 275 Optional Counter Interface Unit Type M12 Remove the cable cover [A] and pass the harness from the optional counter device. Reassemble the machine. 2-205 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 276: Smart Card Reader Built-In Unit Type M12

    2.28 SMART CARD READER BUILT-IN UNIT TYPE M12 2.28.1 ACCESSORY CHECK Description Q’ty Remark IC Card Cover Clamp:LWSM-0605A Decal Sponge:20X20 Upper Cover Operating Instructions MY Bank & QA Registration Card Operation Manual  IC card reader and USB cable are not provided with this option. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-206...

  • Page 277: Installation Procedure

    The main power switch cover has three tabs: two on the left side (paper exit) and one on the right side (right cover). Remove the scanner rear cover [A] ( ×3). Remove the scanner right cover [A] ( ×1). 2-207 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 278 Smart Card Reader Built-in Unit Type M12 Remove the controller cover [A] ( ×4). Slide the controller rear cover [A] to remove it ( ×4). Remove the rear left cover [A] ( ×3). D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-208...
  • Page 279 Make sure that the reading area on the IC card reader is in contact with the IC card cover. If they are not contacted with each other, put the sponge(s) provided underneath the IC card reader to fill the gap. Otherwise, the IC card reader will not work properly. 2-209 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 280 Smart Card Reader Built-in Unit Type M12 11. Turn the upper cover upside down. 12. Route the cable as shown below (Tab × 2). D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-210...
  • Page 281 14. Attach the upper cover [A] assembled in step 8 through step 12 to the main power switch cover ( ×2). 15. Attach the clamps provided along from the right side to the rear side of the main frame ( ×3). 2-211 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 282 16. Attach the main power switch cover with IC card reader [A]. 17. Tighten the screw to secure the main power switch cover ( ×1).  Lead the USB cable into the right side of the main frame as shown below. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-212...
  • Page 283 18. Clamp the USB cable at the four positions ( ×4). 19. Clamp the USB cable at the five positions ( ×5).  If the USB cable is too long, loop and clamp the cable to adjust the length as shown below. 2-213 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 284 22. Connect the USB cable [A] to the USB port of the main machine. 23. Install the IC card cover provided with this option on the IC card reader ( ×4). 24. Turn the main power switch ON, and make sure that the value of SP5-985-002 is set to “1”. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-214...

  • Page 285: Internal Options

    IEEE 802.11a/g/n Interface Unit Type M2 I/F slot A File Format Converter Type E USB Device Server Option Type M12 Mini USB port USB Device Server Option Type M12 *1 There is no difference between the left and right USB ports. 2-215 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 286: Printer/Scanner Unit Type M12

    This option is for basic models only. 2.30.1 COMPONENT CHECK Description Q’ty HDD Unit Cable Cable SD-Card Screw - M3x6 Sheet: Application: Document Box Sheet: Application: Scanner Sheet: Application: Printer PDF Decal CD-ROM Caution Decal Sheet EMC Address Sheet EULA Sheet D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-216...

  • Page 287: Installation Procedure

    Connect the cables [A] [B] to the HDD [C], and then attach the HDD to the bracket [D] of the HDD ( x4). Connect the cables of the HDD to the controller board [A], and then hang the HDD [B] on the hook of the controller box ( x2). 2-217 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 288 SP5-985-001 (On-board NIC): 1 (Enabled)  SP5-985-002 (On-board USB): 1 (Enabled) You must turn the machine off/on because the setting only takes effect after the machine is restarted. 13. Turn off the main power after the power indicator turns off. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-218...
  • Page 289  Be sure that you have set the On-board Device settings (SP5-985-001 and -002, as explained above) before inserting the SD card.. 16. Do SP5-853-001 to copy the preset stamp data from the firmware to the hard disk. 2-219 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 290 When adding the Printer/Scanner Unit to a machine with the Fax Unit installed, additional procedures are required. Turn on the main power. Do SP5-846-040 to copy the address book to the hard disk from the controller board. Turn off the main power after the power indicator is unlit. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-220...

  • Page 291: Ieee 1284 Interface Board Type A

    IEEE 1284 Interface Board Type A 2.31 IEEE 1284 INTERFACE BOARD TYPE A 2.31.1 COMPONENT CHECK Description Q’ty IEEE 1284 Interface Board UL Sheet EMC Address Sheet FCC Sheet ROHS Sheet Caution Sheet 2-221 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 292: Installation

    Use a screwdriver to tighten the knob-screws. Do not tighten manually, because this can disconnect the board. Print out the “Configuration Page”, and then check if this option is correctly recognized.  User Tools/Counter > Printer Features > List/Test Page > Configuration Page D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-222...

  • Page 293: Ieee 802.11A/G/N Interface Unit Type M2

    IEEE 802.11a/g/n Interface Unit Type M2 2.32 IEEE 802.11A/G/N INTERFACE UNIT TYPE M2 2.32.1 ACCESSORY CHECK Description Q’ty IEEE 802.11a/g/n Interface Board Velcro Fasteners Antenna Clamps EMC Address Sheet FCC Sheet Caution Sheet: Each Area Setup Sheet 2-223 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 294: Installation

    Install the IEEE 802.11 interface board in the I/F slot [A] ( x2).  Use a screwdriver to tighten the knob-screws. Do not tighten manually, because this can disconnect the board. Look at the markings on the antenna bracket. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-224...
  • Page 295 Attach Antenna 1 [B] to the left rear of the machine. (The core on the Antenna 1 cable is black.) Attach Antenna 2 [A] to the right rear of the machine. (The core on the Antenna 2 cable is white.) Attach the clamps as shown below. 2-225 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 296: User Tool Settings For Ieee 802.11A/G/N

    The same WEP key is required on the receiving side in order to unlock encoded data. There are 64 bit and 128 bit WEP keys. Range of Allowed Settings: 64 bit: 10 characters 128 bit: 26 characters D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-226...
  • Page 297 Press “Wireless LAN Signal” to check the machine's radio wave status using the operation panel. Press “Restore Factory Defaults” to initialize the wireless LAN settings. Press “Yes” to initialize the following settings:  Transmission mode  Channel  Transmission Speed   SSID  WEP Key 2-227 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 298: Sp Mode Settings For Ieee 802.11 Wireless Lan

    WEP Mode UP mode string that can be used for the WEP Key entry. WPA2 Encryption Used to confirm the current WPA2 encryption Method setting. WPA2 Authent. Used to confirm the current WPA2 Method authentication setting and pre-shared key. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-228...

  • Page 299: Bluetooth Interface Unit Type D

    Insert the Bluetooth unit [A] into one of the USB slots. Plug in and turn ON the main power. Print out the “Configuration Page”, and then check if this option is correctly recognized.  User Tools/Counter > Printer Features > List/Test Page > Configuration Page 2-229 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 300: File Format Converter Type E

    Q'ty File Format Converter (MLB: Media Link Board) EMC Address Sheet FCC Sheet ROHS Decal Sheet 2.34.2 INSTALLATION  Turn off the main power and disconnect the power supply cord. Remove the I/F slot cover [A] ( x2). D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-230...
  • Page 301 Install the board of the file format converter in the I/F slot [A] ( x2). Turn on the main power of the machine. Print out the “Configuration Page”, and then check if this option is correctly recognized.  User Tools/Counter > Printer Features > List/Test Page > Configuration Page 2-231 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 302: Usb Device Server Option Type M12

    Interface Board Surface Item Description Switch Used to reset to the factory settings. Ethernet port Used to connect the Ethernet cable. Used to connect this option to the main machine. USB port Do not use this port with other options. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-232...

  • Page 303: Installation Procedure

    Turn off the main power of the machine, and unplug the power cord from the wall socket. Remove the interface slot cover [A] ( x 2). Install the interface board in the interface slot [A] ( x 2). 2-233 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 304 The machine shape and/or USB port location differs depending on the machine. Attach the ferrite cores to the Ethernet cable, while looping the cable at 3 cm (approx. 1.2 inch) [A] from the each end of the cable. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-234...
  • Page 305 Do not unplug the USB cable while the machine is recognizing this option. It may take between 30 seconds to 1 minute to finish recognizing it (the LEDs on the Ethernet port of this option light up after recognizing this option; see below). If unplugged, connect the cable again. 2-235 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 306 10a. Access the option’s IP address from a PC browser. 10b. Ping the option’s IP address from a command prompt on a Windows PC in the same network as the D197 series machine. • If IP address cannot be found (DHCP server), use the MAC address. This is the number printed on the seal affixed to the printed circuit board for the USB server.

  • Page 307: What Do The Led Indications Mean

    Rev. 07/01/2015 10-(d). Ping the “RX” + “MAC address” from command prompt, windows PC which is in the same network with D197 series machine. ・When Installing the USB Device Server Option Type M12, the installation status couldn’t be shown in Configuration Page.

  • Page 308: Ip Address Setting

    5. Type [http://192.168.100.100/] in the address bar. 6. Press the “Enter” key.  The setting screen for this option appears. 7. Click [Network Setting]. 8. Type [root] in the user name textbox and click [OK]. 9. Input [IP Address], [Subnet Mask] and [Default Gateway]. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-238...
  • Page 309 12. Close the web browser. 13. Disconnect the Ethernet cable from the PC. 14. Connect the Ethernet cable to a network device (e.g. switching hub). 15. Set the IP address of this option in the printer driver which you use. 2-239 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 310: Copy Data Security Unit Type G

    Small bracket Not used Screws: M3x4 Spacer:SQ-7 Not used Screws: M3x8 2.36.2 INSTALLATION  Turn off the main power and disconnect the power supply cord. 1. Attach the bracket [A] to the ICIB-3 [B] ( x2; M3 x 4). D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-240...
  • Page 311 Copy Data Security Unit Type G 1. Remove the controller cover [A] ( ×4). 2. Remove the controller rear cover [A] ( ×4). 2-241 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 312: User Tool Setting

    If you forget to do this, “Data Security for Copying“ feature cannot appear in the user tool setting. Also, SC165 will appear every time the machine is switched on, and the machine cannot be used. 5. Make sure that the machine can recognize the option. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-242...

  • Page 313: Hard Disk Drive Option Type M12

    2.37.1 ACCESSORY CHECK Description Q’ty HDD Unit Cable Cable Screw Sheet: Application: Document Server: NA Sheet: Application: Document Server: EU Sheet: Application: Document Server: CHN Sheet: Application: Document Server: TWN EMC Address Sheet ROHS Decal Sheet ROHS Label 2-243 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 314: Installation

    4. Connect the cables of the HDD to the controller board [A], and then hang the HDD [B] on the hook of the controller box ( x2). 5. Secure the HDD [B] ( x3). 6. Reassemble the removed covers. 7. Plug the power cord and turn on the main power of the machine. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-244...
  • Page 315 9. Do SP5-853-001 to copy the preset stamp data from the firmware to the hard disk. 10. Do SP5-846-040 to copy the address book to the hard disk from the controller board. 11. Do SP5-846-041 to let the user get access to the address book. 12. Turn the main power off and on. 2-245 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 316: Sd Card Option

    SD Card Option 2.38 SD CARD OPTION 2.38.1 SD CARD SLOTS [A]: SD card slot 1 (option slot) [B]: SD card slot 2 (service slot) D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-246...

  • Page 317: List Of Slots Used

    OCR Unit Type M2 Browser Unit Type M12 SD card for NetWare printing Type M12 Slot 1 or Slot PostScript3 Unit Type M12 XPS Direct Print Option Type M12 IPDS Unit Type M7 Fax Connection Unit Type M12 2-247 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 318: Sd Card Appli Move

    If the write protect switch is ON, a download error (e.g. Error Code 44) occurs during a firmware upgrade or application merge.  If the printer/scanner unit or the printer unit has been installed, the destination card should be those SD cards. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-248...

  • Page 319: Undo Exec

    7. Follow the messages shown on the operation panel. 8. Turn off the main power. 9. Remove the SD card from SD Card Slot 2. 10. Turn on the main power. 11. Check that the application programs run normally. 2-249 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 320: Ocr Unit Type M2

    Q’ty SD Card 2.40.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Turn OFF the main power. 2. Remove the SD card slot cover ( ×1) 3. Insert the OCR module SD card in SD card slot 1 [A] or slot 2 [B]. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-250...
  • Page 321 Dictionary data is copied to the HDD.  On the first run, SP5-878-004 links the SD card, and on the second run, copies dictionary data. 9. Turn the main power OFF, and remove the SD card from the SD card slot. 2-251 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 322 13. Check if [OCR Settings] is displayed on the [Send File Type / Name] screen.  After installation, the OCR setting can be changed on the "OCR setting" screen.  When setting OCR, set [OCR setting] to [Yes]. (Default setting: [No]) D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-252...

  • Page 323: Recovery Procedure

    When the HDD and NVRAM are replaced simultaneously Reinstall using the original SD card. If the original SD card is lost Order and reinstall a new SD card (service part).  Perform reinstallation in the same way as installation. 2-253 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 324: Browser Unit Type M12

    In addition to link-up with the conventional Scan Router and MFP, the browser unit has the following functions.  For scanning, arbitrary distribution types and preset values are selected/set and delivered.  Mail is delivered (login transmission) to an address previously set in the profile of the user who logged in. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-254...
  • Page 325 2. Remove the empty SD card from SD card slot 2. 11. Reattach the cover and turn on the main power. 12. Press the [Default setting/Counter] key. 13. Press the [Home editing] button. 14. Press the [Add icon] button. 2-255 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 326: To Update Exjs

    12. Turn the main power ON. 13. Press the [Default setting/counter] key. 14. Press the [Extension function default setting] button. 15. Press the [Extension function default setting] button on the [Extension function default menu setting] screen. 16. Press the [Install] tab. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-256...

  • Page 327: When Checking The Version Of Exjs

    5. Check the version of [Extended JS] on the “Startup settings tab” is the latest version.  If checked apart from the above procedure (firmware version displayed in system default settings), a different version from the actual version may be displayed. 2-257 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 328: Browser Unit Uninstallation Procedure

    4. Press the [Home screen] button on the “Browser Settings” tab. 5. Press the [URL input] button. 6. Input the URL, and press the [OK] button. 7. Press the [Settings] button. 8. Press the [End] button twice, and finish. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-258...

  • Page 329: Sd Card For Netware Printing Type M12

    2.42 SD CARD FOR NETWARE PRINTING TYPE M12 2.42.1 COMPONENT CHECK Description Q’ty SD Card EMC Address Sheet ROHS Decal Sheet ROHS Label 2.42.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Turn OFF the main power. 2. Remove the SD card slot cover ( ×1) 2-259 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 330 5. Attach the SD card slot cover ( ×1). 6. Turn ON the main power. 7. Print out the “Configuration Page”, and then check if this option is correctly recognized.  User Tools/Counter > Printer Features > List/Test Page > Configuration Page D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-260...

  • Page 331: Postscript3 Unit Type M12

    PostScript3 Unit Type M12 2.43 POSTSCRIPT3 UNIT TYPE M12 2.43.1 COMPONENT CHECK Description Q’ty SD Card PS3 Decal 2.43.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Turn the main power OFF. 2. Remove the SD card slot cover [A] ( ×1) 2-261 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 332 The PS3 firmware is a dongle (key) which enables PS3 data printing functions. When the PS3 firmware is installed, the PS3 program in the PDF firmware is enabled. Due to this specification, the self-diagnosis result report shows the ROM part number/software version of the PDF firmware contained in the PS3 program. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-262...

  • Page 333: Xps Direct Print Option Type M12

    2.44.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Turn off the main power. 2. Remove the SD card slot cover [A] ( x 1). 3. Slowly, insert the XPS SD card in Slot 1 with its label face towards the front of the machine. 2-263 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 334 5. Attach the SD card slot cover ( x 1). 6. Turn on the machine. 7. Print out the “Configuration Page”, and then check if this option is correctly recognized.  User Tools/Counter > Printer Features > List/Test Page > Configuration Page D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-264...

  • Page 335: Ipds Unit Type M12

    Check the accessories and their quantities against the table below. Description Q'ty IPDS Emulation SD Card Decal EULA Sheet Caution Sheet CD-ROM 2.45.2 INSTALLATION 1. Turn the main power OFF. 2. Remove the SD card slot cover [A] ( ×1) 2-265 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 336 2. Execute the following commands: msh> set ipds up ***If you want to stop the function. msh> set ipds down B. [Enable the IPDS option via WebImageMonitor] 1. Log in to WebImageMonitor. 2. Change the setting to enable IPDS. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-266...
  • Page 337 Line up the left side of the decal with the left edge of the main power switch. ([B]: 10 mm or more) 9. Print out the “Configuration Page”, and then check if this option is correctly recognized.  User Tools/Counter > Printer Features > List/Test Page > Configuration Page 2-267 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 338: External Keyboard Bracket Type M3 (D739-10)

    Keyboard Stand Screw: M4 x 12 Screw: M3 x 8 Screw: M3 x 12 ROHS Decal Sheet ROHS Label 2.46.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Open the right cover. 2. Remove the main power switch cover [A] ( ×1, hooks). D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-268...
  • Page 339 3. Remove the screw [A] on the frame of the machine. 4. Make 3 screw holes [A] in the main power switch cover, and then reattach it to the machine ( ×1, hooks). 5. Attach the keyboard stand bracket [A] on the main power switch cover ( x3). 2-269 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 340 7. Place a keyboard [A] on the keyboard stand, and then pass the keyboard cable through the hole [B] in the keyboard stand. 8. Scanner rear cover [A] ( ×3) 9. Scanner right cover [A] ( ×1) 10. Route the keyboard cable along the right side of the scanner unit as shown below. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-270...
  • Page 341 12. Adjust the keyboard cable by making loops if the keyboard cable has too much slack. 13. Remove the cutout [A] in the left rear cover to make a cable hole, and then pass the keyboard cable [B] through it. 2-271 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 342 14. Connect the keyboard cable to the USB slot. 15. Reattach the scanner right cover [A] ( ×1). 16. Reattach the scanner rear cover [A] ( ×3). 17. Close the right cover. 18. How to enable the keyboard: User Tools→System Settings→Admin Tools→Keyboard set to desired language. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-272...

  • Page 343: Data Overwrite Security Unit Type I (D362)

    2. Make sure that the following settings are not at their factory default values:  Supervisor login password  Administrator login name  Administrator login password If any of these settings is at a factory default value, tell the customer these settings must be changed before you do the installation procedure. 2-273 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 344: Seal Check And Removal

    2. If the surfaces of the tapes do not show “VOID”, remove them from the corners of the box. 3. You can see the “VOID” marks [B] when you remove each seal. In this condition, they cannot be attached to the box again. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-274...

  • Page 345: Installation Procedure

    3. Insert the SD card (DataOverwriteSecurity Unit) in SD slot 1 (upper) [A] with its label face towards the front of the machine. Then push it slowly into SD slot 1 (upper) until you hear a click. 4. Install the application using SP5-878-001. 2-275 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 346: Security Setting

    "NVRAM" mentioned in here means the NVRAM on the Controller Board.  "NVRAM" or EEPROM on the BCU has nothing to do with this. Please use the following procedure when the Data Overwrite Security and HDD Encryption are reinstalled. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-276...

  • Page 347: Data Overwrite Security

    The Auto Erase Memory function can be enabled by the following procedure. 1. Log in as the machine administrator from the control panel. 2. Press [System Settings]. 3. Press [Administrator Tools]. 4. Press [Next] three times. 5. Press [Auto Erase Memory Setting]. 6. Press [On]. 2-277 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 348 The icon [2] is lit when there is no temporary data to be overwritten. Icon [1] This icon is lit when there is temporary data to be overwritten, and blinks during overwriting. Icon [2] This icon is lit when there is no temporary data to be overwritten. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-278...

  • Page 349: Hdd Encryption

    1. Turn on the main power. 2. Log in as the machine administrator from the control panel. 3. Press [System Settings]. 4. Press [Administrator Tools]. 5. Press [Next] three times. 6. Press [Machine Data Encryption Settings]. 2-279 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 350 The machine will start to convert the data on the memory after you turn on the machine. Wait until the message "Memory conversion complete. Turn the main power switch off." appears, and then turn the main power off again. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-280...

  • Page 351: Backing Up The Encryption Key

    1. Log in as the machine administrator from the control panel. 2. Press [System Settings]. 3. Press [Administrator Tools]. 4. Press [Next] three times. 5. Press [Machine Data Encryption Settings]. 6. Press [Print Encryption Key]. 2-281 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 352: Encryption Key Restoration

    6. Confirm that a message is displayed on the LCD telling to insert the SD card that contains the encryption key. 7. Turn off the main power. 8. Insert the SD card that contains the encryption key into SD card slot 2 (the lower slot). 9. Turn on the main power. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-282...
  • Page 353 10. Remove the SD card from SD card Slot 2. 11. Turn on the main power. 12. Memory clear SP5-801-xx (Exclude SP-5-801-001: All Clear and SP-5-801-002: Engine), and clear SP5-846-046: address book. 13. Set necessary user settings in User Tools key. 2-283 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 354: Remote Settings

    Execute the @Remote Settings 1. Enter the SP mode. 2. Input the Request number which you have obtained from @Remote Center GUI, and then enter [OK] with SP5816-202. 3. Confirm the Request number, and then click [EXECUTE] with SP5816-203. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-284...
  • Page 355 * These errors occur only in the modems Invalid setting value (modem) that support @Remote. Low power supply current unplugged modem Busy line 5. Make sure that the screen displays the Location Information with SP5816-205 only when it has been input at the Center GUI. 2-285 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 356 Dial-up authentication error Answer tone detection error Carrier detection error * These errors occur only in the modems Invalid setting value (modem) that support @Remote. Low power supply current unplugged modem Busy line 8. Exit the SP mode. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-286...
  • Page 357 The ID2 in the NVRAM does not match -12009 Check ID2 of the mainframe. the ID2 in the individual certification. -12010 The certification area is not initialized. Initialize the certification area. 2-287 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 358 Mainframe not managed -2395 Box ID for external RCG is illegal. Mainframe ID for external RCG is -2396 illegal. -2397 Incorrect ID2 format Check the ID2 of the mainframe. -2398 Incorrect request number format Check the Request No. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 2-288...

  • Page 359: Operation Guidance For Users

    Overview of various settings inside each tab in the printer driver (e.g. duplex printing)  Scanner (when How to install printer drivers (using the recommended installed) method)  How to connect to a PC and perform a test scan 2-289 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 360: Preventive Maintenance

    Operation Guidance for Users PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE R E V I S I O N H I S T O RY Pag e Date Ad d ed / Upd ated / New None D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 362: Preventive Maintenance Tables

    Preventive Maintenance Tables 3. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE 3.1 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE TABLES See “Appendices” for the following information:  Preventive Maintenance Tables D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 363: Image Quality Standards

    Book: S-5 Copy onto plain paper (100%/Enlargement), more (revised) using Auto Image Black and White (1C) Min 4.5lines/mm or Density/5 notches and more then determine resolution. Copy (Reduction), Min 4.5×M lines/mm DF: S-5Y Black and White (1C) or more (revised) D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 364: Magnification Ratio Error Margin

    Copy (Reduction), ±1.00% or less The swelling/shrinkage of Main Scan/Sub paper caused by humidity Scan, Black and are excluded. White (1C) First side of the sheet Copy ±1.00% or less only. (Enlargement), Main Scan/Sub Scan, Black and White (1C) D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 365: Magnification Ratio Error Margin Deviation

    Specification Chart Measuring method Engine, Black and ±1.25mm/200mm or Measure with the full length Mono_CCD White(1C) less (90° ± 0.35°) and width of the image. Copy (100%), Black ±1.75mm/200mm or Scale chart and White (1C) less (90° ± 0.5°) D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 366: Linearity

    ±0.50mm/100mm or Inner line White (1C) less 100mm Base line Copy 100mm 0.5mm 3.2.7 PARALLELISM Item Specification Chart Measuring method Engine, Black and Measure with the full length ± 1.8mm or less Mono_CCD White(1C) and width of the image. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 367: Missing Image Area

    0.5 to 6.0mm (trailing edge), Black (Duplex: 3.0 to and White(1C) 6.0mm) 3.2.9 MARGIN POSITION Item Specification Chart Measuring method Engine (simplex), 0±1.5mm Mono_CCD Main Scan/Sub Scan, Black and White (1C) Engine (duplex), 0±3mm Main Scan/Sub Scan, Black and White (1C) D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 368: Paper Transfer Quality Standards

    Item Specification Note 1st side, B5 SEF or less 0±1.3mm/100mm or less 1st side, B5 SEF or more 0±0.9mm/100mm or more 2nd side, B5 SEF or less 0±1.8mm/100mm or less 2nd side, B5 SEF or more ±1.3mm/100mm or more D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 369: Adf

    0±2.3mm/100mm or less 1st side, B5 SEF or more 0±1.4mm/100mm or more 2nd side, B5 SEF or less 0±2.8mm/100mm or less 2nd side, B5 SEF or more, 0±1.8mm/100mm or more DF3080 2nd side, B5 SEF or more, 0±2.3mm/100mm or more DF3090 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 370: Pm Parts Settings

    (Development Mixing Auger Bearings): SP3-701-028 PTR (Paper Transfer) Unit SP3-701-108 Fusing Unit: SP3-701-115 Fusing Belt (Heating Sleeve Belt Unit): Fusing Unit SP3-701-116 Pressure Roller: SP3-701-118 Pressure Roller Bearings: SP3-701-119 ADF: Pick-up Roller: SP3-701-206 ADF: Feeding Belt: SP3-701-207 ADF: Reverse Roller: SP3-701-208 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 371: After Installing The New Pm Parts

    Replace the heating sleeve belt unit before the machine stops its operation (stop warning: 240K pages, stop: 260K pages for D197/D198/D199, stop warning: 320K pages, stop: 350K pages for D200/D201/D202). 3.4.2 AFTER INSTALLING THE NEW PM PARTS Turn on the main power.

  • Page 372: Replacement And Adjustment

    PM Parts Settings REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT R E V I S I O N H I S T O RY Pag e Date Ad d ed / Upd ated / New None D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 374: Notes On The Main Power Switch

    After you unplug the power cord from the AC wall outlet, in order to remove the residual charge from inside the machine, be sure to press the main power switch. Thus, the charge remaining in the machine is released, and it is possible to remove boards. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 375 If you press the main power switch while the residual charge was already released, the power ON flag will not be set. At this time, start the machine manually by pressing the main power switch. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 376: Shutdown Method

    To make a forced shutdown, press and hold the main power switch for 6 seconds. In general, do not use the forced shutdown.  Forced shutdown may damage the hard disk and memory, and can cause damage to the machine. Use a forced shutdown only if it is unavoidable. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 377: Beforehand

    Beforehand 4.2 BEFOREHAND  Turn off the main power switch and disconnect the power cord.  After replacing, make sure that all removed harnesses are connected up again and secured in their clamps. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 378: Special Tools And Lubricants

    A PC (Personal Computer) is required for creating the Encryption key file to an SD card when replacing the controller board for a model in which HDD encryption has been enabled. 4.3.2 LUBRICANTS Unique or Part No. Description Q'ty Common 52039502 Silicone Grease G-501 C (General) A2579300 Grease Barrierta – S552R C (General) D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 379: Cover Removal Order

    Operation Panel Rear Lower Gap Cover Tray Support Rod Cover Rear Lower Cover Paper Exit Tray Scanner Right Cover Upper Inner Cover Right Upper Cover Connector Cover Right Cover Main Power Switch Cover Bypass Tray Front Cover Right Rear Cover D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 380 Name Name 1st Paper Feed Tray Right Lower Cover 2nd Paper Feed Tray Scanner Left Cover Bank Left Rear Cover Scanner Rear Cover Controller Cover Rear Right Cover Left Upper Cover Rear Left Cover Left Cover Controller Rear Cover D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 381: Cover Removal Order

    4.4.2 COVER REMOVAL ORDER How to use this chart: Example—To remove the right cover, remove the rear lower cover, right rear cover, and 1st Paper Feed Tray Right Cover. * Red parts can be removed itself without removing other parts. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 382: Exterior Covers

    The aim of these components is to prevent the products, which are heavy, from toppling as a result of people running into or leaning onto the products, which can lead to serious accidents such as persons becoming trapped under the product. (U.S.: UL60950-1, Europe: EN60950-1) D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 383: Front Cover

    Exterior Covers 4.5.1 FRONT COVER Open the front cover [A]. Belt [A] and front cover  The front cover can be removed by sliding it in the direction of the blue arrow. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-10...

  • Page 384: Controller Cover

    Exterior Covers 4.5.2 CONTROLLER COVER Controller cover [A] ( ×4) 4-11 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 385: Left Upper Cover

    Each part enclosed by a blue circle has a tab. Be careful not to damage it when attaching and detaching. Open the front cover (page 4-10). Paper exit tray (page 4-23) Left upper cover [A] ( ×1)  Slide the cover in the direction of the blue arrow. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-12...

  • Page 386: Left Rear Cover

    Exterior Covers 4.5.4 LEFT REAR COVER Left upper cover (page 4-12) Rear lower gap cover (page 4-17) Left Rear Cover [A] ( ×2, ×1) 4-13 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 387: Left Cover

    Each part enclosed by a blue circle has a tab. Be careful not to damage it when attaching and detaching. Left upper cover (page 4-12) Controller cover (page 4-11) Pull out the 1st and 2nd paper feed trays. Open the front cover. Left cover [A] ( ×5) Remove it while pressing down. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-14...

  • Page 388: Controller Rear Cover

    4.5.6 CONTROLLER REAR COVER  There are some claws on the back face of the controller rear cover. When fitting or removing the cover, take care not to damage them. Controller cover (page 4-11) Controller rear cover [A] ( ×4) 4-15 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 389: Rear Left Cover

    Exterior Covers 4.5.7 REAR LEFT COVER Controller rear cover (page 4-15) Scanner rear cover (page 4-18) Rear left cover ( ×3) 4.5.8 REAR RIGHT COVER Rear left cover (page 4-16) Rear Right Cover [A] ( ×5) D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-16...

  • Page 390: Rear Lower Cover

    Exterior Covers 4.5.9 REAR LOWER GAP COVER Rear lower gap cover [A] (hook×2) 4.5.10 REAR LOWER COVER Controller rear cover (page 4-15) Rear lower gap cover (page 4-17) Rear lower cover [A] ( ×5) 4-17 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 391: Scanner Rear Cover

    4.5.12 RIGHT REAR COVER Open the right cover. Rear lower gap cover (page 4-17) Right rear cover [A] ( ×4)  When installing, insert the projections [A] in the holes [B], taking care not to trap the harness inside. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-18...

  • Page 392: Right Upper Cover

    Exterior Covers 4.5.13 RIGHT UPPER COVER Main Power Switch Cover (page 4-22) Right upper cover [A] ( ×2) 4-19 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 393: Right Cover

    Open the 1st paper feed tray [A], 2nd paper feed tray [B] and right cover [D] 1st paper feed tray right cover [C] ( ×1). Right rear cover (page 4-18) Rear lower cover (page 4-17) Remove clamps and connectors. ( x6, Right cover arms [A] [B] ( ×2) D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-20...
  • Page 394 Exterior Covers Slide to the left and remove right cover [A] ( ×1). 4-21 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 395: Main Power Switch Cover

    Open the right cover. Main power switch cover [A] ( ×1)  The main power switch cover has three tabs: two on the left side (paper exit) and one on the right side (right cover). 4.5.16 INVERTER TRAY Inverter Tray [A] D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-22...

  • Page 396: Paper Exit Tray

    Exterior Covers 4.5.17 PAPER EXIT TRAY Paper Exit Tray [A] 4.5.18 PAPER EXIT COVER Main power switch cover (page 4-22) Paper exit tray (page 4-23) Inverter Tray (page 4-22) Paper exit cover [A] ( ×1) 4-23 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 397: Paper Exit Lower Cover

    Exterior Covers 4.5.19 PAPER EXIT LOWER COVER Left rear cover (page 4-13) Paper exit cover (page 4-23) Connector cover [A]. Paper exit lower cover [A] ( ×2) D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-24...

  • Page 398: Upper Inner Cover

    Left upper cover (page 4-12) Paper exit cover (page 4-23) Paper exit lower cover (page 4-24) Tray support rod cover [A] ( ×1) Two screws on the upper inner cover [A] ( ×2) Upper inner cover [A] ( ×2) 4-25 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 399: Paper Exit

    4.5.21 PAPER EXIT FRONT COVER Paper exit lower cover (page 4-24) Paper exit front cover [A] ( ×4) 4.5.22 INNER COVER Front cover (page 4-10) Open the right cover. Laser unit cover ( ×1) Inner cover [A] ( ×7, ×1) D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-26...

  • Page 400: Toner Supply Housing

    Pull out the toner bottle Paper exit lower cover (page 4-24) Upper inner cover (page 4-25) Development exhaust fan (page 4-182) Fan [A] with duct ( ×2) Bracket [A] [B] ( ×6) Four screws on the toner supply housing ( ×4) 4-27 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 401 Exterior Covers Toner supply housing [A] D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-28...

  • Page 402: Operation Panel

    Operation Panel 4.6 OPERATION PANEL 4.6.1 OPERATION PANEL Scanner front cover (page 4-37) Operation panel upper cover [A] Operation panel [A] ( ×5, ×2) 4-29 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 403: Key Control Board

    Operation Panel 4.6.2 KEY CONTROL BOARD Operation panel (page 4-29) Operation panel lower cover [A] ( ×6) Harness guide [A] ( ×2) Bracket covers [A] [B] Operation panel arm bracket [A] ( ×6) D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-30...
  • Page 404 Operation Panel Key control board [A] ( ×8, ×1, 4-31 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 405: Interface Board

    Operation panel lower cover (page 4-30 "Key Control Board") Harness guide (page 4-30 "Key Control Board") Bracket covers (page 4-30 "Key Control Board") Operation panel arm bracket (page 4-30 "Key Control Board") LCD panel unit [A] ( ×6, ×5, USB×2) D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-32...

  • Page 406: Lcd

    There is no difference in appearance, but there is a difference in internal layout.  LCD bracket There is a difference in the shape of the bracket and the stamp inside the blue circle. S Co.: S stamp C Co.: CM stamp 4-33 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 407 Operation Panel  Use of FFC (Flexible Flat Cable) For S Co., FFC is used, but for C Co., instead of an FFC, a cable integrated with the LCD (orange) is used. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-34...

  • Page 408: Replacement Procedure

    Operation panel lower cover (page 4-30 "Key Control Board") Harness guide (page 4-30 "Key Control Board") Bracket covers (page 4-30 "Key Control Board") Operation panel arm bracket (page 4-30 "Key Control Board") LCD Panel (page 4-32) LCD [A] 4-35 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 409: Scanner Unit

    Remove either unit, referring to the installation procedure for the platen cover or DF. Scanner rear cover (page 4-18) Scanner Upper Cover [A] ( ×2) Scanner Right Cover Scanner rear cover (page 4-18) Scanner right cover [A] ( ×1) D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-36...

  • Page 410: Scanner Front Cover

    First, carefully and slightly pull the left side of the cover towards the outside and release the left side tab, then pull up the right upper side tab and release it. 4-37 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 411: Scanner Left Cover

    Scanner Unit Scanner Left Cover Scanner front cover (page 4-37) Scanner left cover [A] ( ×3) 4.7.2 EXPOSURE GLASS Open the platen cover or ADF Guide Scale [A] ( ×3) ADF exposure glass [A] Rear scale [A] ( ×3) D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-38...
  • Page 412  The red mark [A] of the ADF exposure glass is on the left at the rear of the operation panel.  The locating holes of the left scale fit over the locating bosses of the front/rear frame. 4-39 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 413: Scanner Lamp

    Scanner Unit 4.7.3 SCANNER LAMP Exposure glass (page 4-38) Move the exposure lamp (1st scanner carriage) [A] to position [B]. Scanner lamp [A] ( ×2, ×1) D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-40...

  • Page 414: Scanner Motor

    Scanner upper cover (page 4-36) Scanner motor frame [A] ( ×4, ×3)  To remove the inner two screws, insert your screwdriver as shown by the blue arrows below. Spring [A] Scanner motor unit [A] ( ×2, ×1) 4-41 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 415 Scanner Unit Scanner motor [A] ( ×2) D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-42...

  • Page 416: Lens Block

    Scanner Unit 4.7.5 LENS BLOCK Exposure Glass (page 4-38) Lens block cover [A] ( ×2) Lens block [A] ( ×5, ×2) 4-43 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 417: Original Size Sensors (Aps)

    Exposure glass (page 4-38) Original size sensors [A] ( ×2)  When a screw driver is inserted, the tab can be removed smoothly. 4.7.7 SIO Scanner rear cover (page 4-18) Scanner upper cover (page 4-36) SIO [A] ( ×4, ×6) D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-44...

  • Page 418: Scanner Hp Sensor

    4.7.8 SCANNER HP SENSOR Scanner upper cover (page 4-36) Exposure glass (page 4-38) Slide the exposure lamp (1st scanner carriage) [A] in the direction of the arrow a little. Peel off the sensor stopper [A]. Scanner HP Sensor [A] ( ×1) 4-45 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 419: Df Position Sensor

    Be sure to use the special tool for scanner wire adjustment. (page 4-5) Scanner Wire (Front) Exposure glass (page 4-38) Scanner right cover (page 4-36) Operation panel (page 4-29) Main power switch cover (page 4-22) Lower bracket [A] of the operation panel ( ×6, ×3) D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-46...
  • Page 420 Scanner Unit Scanner front frame [A] ( ×6) Move the 1st scanner carriage to the set position of the scanner fixing pin. Wire clamp [A] ( ×1) 4-47 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 421 Wire fixing bracket [A], spring [B] ( ×1) 10. Wire pulley [A] ( × 1, × 1, bearing × 1)  Do not touch the mirror and the lamp.  When you move the carriage, hold the central part and move it gently. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-48...

  • Page 422: Scanner Wire Assembly (Front)

    Fit the ball at the middle of the wire into the cutout in the pulley [A]. Coil up the ball-shaped end of the wire counter clockwise (when looking at the boss of the pulley) four and half times, next to the rim at the rear side of the pulley. 4-49 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 423 Set the ball-shaped end of the wire with the following procedure. 1. Route the wire from under side of the pulley [A] of the left frame toward the upside and hook the wire on the outer edge of the pulley [A]. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-50...
  • Page 424 Set the ring-shaped end of the wire with the following procedure. 1. Route the wire from the underside of the pulley [A] of the right frame toward upside and hook the wire on the outer edge of the pulley [A]. 4-51 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 425 2. Route the wire over the 2nd carriage pulley [A] in the direction of the blue arrow. 3. Attach the wire to the fixing bracket [A]. 4. Attach the fixing bracket [A] ( × 1: temporary securing, spring×1) 5. Hook the wire [B] on the notch of the carriage [A]. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-52...

  • Page 426: Scanner Position Adjustment

     Same position as [B] on the rear side Tighten the screw [C] of the pulley which was temporarily tightened. Tighten the screw [D] of the fixing bracket which was temporarily tightened. Attach the scanner fixing bracket [E]. 4-53 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 427: Scanner Wire (Rear)

    If there is a gap, adjust the scanner wire position again, or perform Scan Registration Adjustment (SP4010 - SP4011). Scanner Wire (Rear) Scanner wire (front) Bracket [A] ( ×4, ×7) Release the harness ( ×5, ×1) Bracket [A] ( ×4) D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-54...
  • Page 428 Scanner Unit SIO with bracket ( ×2, ×5). Scanner rear frame [A] ( ×6) 4-55 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 429 Move the 1st scanner carriage to the set position of the scanner fixing pin. Wire clamp [A] ( ×1) Loosen the belt tension [A] ( ×2, spring ×1) and remove the scanner drive gear [B] ×1). 10. Spring, screws, bearing, clip and wire securing bracket D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-56...

  • Page 430: Scanner Wire Assembly (Rear)

    Scanner Unit 11. Pull out the scanner drive shaft [B] and remove the pulley [A]. Scanner Wire Assembly (Rear) Pass the ball-shaped end of the wire end through the boss in the pulley [A]. 4-57 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 431 Coil up the ball-shaped end of the wire clockwise (when looking at the boss of the pulley) three and half times, next to the rim at the front side of the pulley. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-58...
  • Page 432 Make sure that blue markings of the wire are aligned. Fix the wire temporarily with tape. Set the pulley on the scanner drive shaft ( ×1, bearing×1, ×1). Attach the scanner drive gear [A], and then tighten the scanner motor bracket ( ×3, spring ×1, belt ×1). 4-59 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 433: Modifying The Scanner (Contact/Contactless) When

    11. Do the scanner adjustment. 4.7.11 MODIFYING THE SCANNER (CONTACT/CONTACTLESS) WHEN USING ARDF Procedure for the ADF ADF front cover [A] ( ×1)  Remove with the document table [B] lifted up. Document reader guide plate [A] ( ×1) D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-60...
  • Page 434 Replace the contactless guide plate (front) [A] with the contact guide plate (front) [B] ×1). There is a hole in the contact guide plate (front). Replace the contactless guide plate (rear) [A] with the contact guide plate (rear) [B]. There is a hole in the contact guide plate (rear). 4-61 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 435: Procedure For The Scanner

    Attach the ADF front cover, and return the ADF to its original position. Enter SP mode, and then change the DF density setting (SP4-688-001) from [102%] to [97%]. Procedure for the Scanner Remove the exposure glass, and peel off the black sheet [A] D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-62...

  • Page 436: Modifying The Scanner (Contact/Contactless) When Using Spdf

    Lower entrance guide unit [A] ( ×2)  The part below the contactless lower entrance guide unit is black [A].  The part below the contact lower entrance guide unit is colorless and transparent [B]. Document reader guide plate [A] 4-63 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 437 The part below the contact document reader guide plate is white [B]. Attach the contact document reader guide plate [A]. Attach the contact lower entrance guide unit [B] ( ×2). Enter SP mode, and then change the Scan Image Density Adjustment (SP4-688-002) from [103] to [98]. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-64...

  • Page 438: Procedure For The Scanner

    Peel off the gap sheet (black) [A] from the sheet-through glass [B]. Wipe the exposure glass with alcohol, etc., so that no glue remains from the double-sided tape.  Remember that if any glue remains, it will cause a paper jam in the ADF. 4-65 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 439: Laser Unit

    This copier uses a class IIIb laser beam with a wavelength of 660 nm and an output of 17 mW. The laser can cause serious eye injury. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-66...

  • Page 440: Laser Unit

    Laser Unit 4.8.2 LASER UNIT Removing the Laser Unit Open the front cover. Laser unit cover [A] ( x 1) Release the stopper [A]. Pull out the laser unit [A] ( x 3). 4-67 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 441: Installing A New Laser Unit

    Connect three harnesses to the new laser unit ( x 3). Insert the new laser unit along the guide frame [A].  Make sure that the new laser unit claws fit into two mainframe claws as shown below. Mainframe Claws D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-68...

  • Page 442: Laser Unit Claws

    Laser Unit Laser Unit Claws Set the laser unit with the stopper [A].  Use a screw driver to pry in the stopper. Attach the laser unit cover [A] ( x 1). 4-69 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 443: After Installing The New Laser Unit

    If this step is not correctly done, an image problem may occur on printouts. Perform image adjustments if needed (page 4-197). 4.8.3 QUENCHING LAMP Right cover (page 4-20) Fusing unit (page 4-114) Tabs and connector for the quenching lamp [A] ( x 3, x 1) Quenching lamp [A] D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-70...

  • Page 444: Pcl (Pre Cleaning Light)

    Laser Unit 4.8.4 PCL (PRE CLEANING LIGHT) PCDU (page 4-72) Fusing Unit (page 4-114) PCL [A] ( x1). 4-71 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 445: Pcdu

    If you replace the PCDU, you do not need to perform SP 3-701. This is because the machine detects a new unit automatically when you cycle the main power off/on, and performs the initial adjustment automatically. Open the front cover Open the right cover Tilt the transfer unit [A]. PCDU [A] ( D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-72...

  • Page 446: Pcdu

    When installing the PCDU, push the PCDU into the machine while screwing it in, as shown below, and then secure the PCDU. If the PCDU is not installed straight, the transfer roller contact and release mechanism does not work properly and dirt may appear on the 2nd side of outputs. 4-73 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 447: Pcu/Development Unit

    When installing the face plates, check the fitting points as shown below. [A]: The bearing of the face plate fits together with the OPC drum. [B]: The bearing of the face plate fits together with the bearing of the development roller. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-74...

  • Page 448: Face Plate For Front Side

    If you have to turn the power on again before replacing the part, execute the SP again before replacing the part.  After replacing the development unit, turn on the main power on. Disassemble the PCDU into PCU and development unit (page 4-74). 4-75 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 449 PCDU Replace the used development unit with a new one. Reassemble the PCDU. Pull out the heat seal [A]. Remove the cap [A].  Attach the removed cap to the used development unit. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-76...

  • Page 450: Opc Drum

    If you have to turn the power on again before replacing the part, execute the SP again before replacing the part.  After replacing the OPC drum, turn on the main power on. PCU (page 4-74) Stopper [A] for the PCU Pull out the OPC drum [A]. 4-77 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 451: Charge Roller, Cleaning Roller

    After replacing the rollers, turn the main power switch ON. PCU (page 4-74) OPC drum (page 4-77) Charge roller and cleaning roller [A] with its bearing Split the assembly into the charge roller [A] and cleaning roller [B]. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-78...

  • Page 452: Pick-Off Pawls

    PCU (page 4-74) Pick-off pawls [A]  Use a screw driver to pry away the tabs of the pick-off pawl. If the pick-off pawl has marked the drum with a line, the pick-off pawl position can be adjusted. 4-79 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 453: Cleaning Blade

    Charge roller and cleaning roller (page 4-78) Cleaning blade [A] (  The cleaning blade [A] has two different types of holes: a circle ( ), and an oval ). Remove the screw on the circle side first, and then, remove the oval side. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-80...

  • Page 454: Developer

     After replacing the developer, turn the main power switch ON.  If you replace developer together with the development filter, firstly replace the developer, next replace the filter. Development unit (page 4-74) Bearing (front) [A] (E-ring x1) 4-81 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 455 PCDU Pull the shaft toward the blue arrow shown below, then remove the pin [A] and gear [B]. Gear [A] ( x1) Bearing (rear) [A]. Development side seal and development case entrance seal [A] at each end. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-82...
  • Page 456 Do not touch or hold the development sleeve edge [A] when holding the sleeve unit. Otherwise, it may cause an injury. Remove the developer after turning the development unit upside down in the reverse direction of the development filter.  Rotate the gear to remove as much toner as you can. 4-83 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 457 Stand the development unit up, and add new developer evenly across the width of the development unit while rotating the gear. 10. Reassemble the development sleeve unit, gear and bearing.  The sheets for the development sleeve unit [A] must be under the sheets [B] for the development unit. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-84...
  • Page 458 12. Paste the new development side seals [A] on the face of the development sleeve unit as shown below.  These seals are part of the development seal set, which must be ordered together with the new developer. 4-85 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 459 PCDU 13. Reassemble the PCU and development unit. 14. Turn on the main power switch. The machine detects the new developer and starts the initial adjustment. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-86...

  • Page 460: Development Filter

     After replacing the development filter, turn the main power switch ON.  If you replace the development filter together with developer, firstly replace the developer, next replace the filter. Development unit (page 4-74) Development filter [A] 4-87 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 461: Td Sensor

    PCDU 4.9.10 TD SENSOR Development unit (page 4-74) TD sensor cover [A].  Use a screw driver to release the tab(s) of the cover. TD sensor [A] ( D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-88...

  • Page 462: Development Mixing Auger Bearings

    Pull the shaft toward you, and then pull out the pin [A] and remove the gear [B]. Gears [A] [B] ( x1, E-ring x1) Two development mixing auger bearings [A] (E-ring x1). Gears [A] [B] [C] (E-ring x2) 4-89 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 463 PCDU Two development mixing auger bearings [A].  The development mixing auger bearings are D-shaped. Make sure that you install them in the orientation exactly as shown above. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-90...

  • Page 464: Development Mixing Auger (L / R)

    4.9.12 DEVELOPMENT MIXING AUGER (L / R)  [A]: Development Mixing Auger (L)  [B]: Development Mixing Auger (R) Development Unit (page 4-74) Developer (page 4-81) Development Mixing Auger Bearings (page 4-89) Development Mixing Auger (L) [A] Development Mixing Auger (R) [A] 4-91 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 465 PCDU  Each auger is different; please make sure that the augers are attached correctly.  [A]: Development Mixing Auger (L)  [B]: Development Mixing Auger (R) D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-92...

  • Page 466: Waste Toner

    There is no waste toner bottle set switch. If you remove the waste toner bottle, be sure to replace it before you finish work on the machine. 4.10.2 TONER COLLECTION FULL SENSOR Waste toner bottle (page 4-93). Tone collection full sensor [A] ( ×1). 4-93 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 467: Recycling Shutter Solenoid

    Waste Toner 4.10.3 RECYCLING SHUTTER SOLENOID Waste toner bottle (page 4-93). PCDU (page 4-72). Controller box (page 4-177). Development Bearing Cooling Fan for D200/D201/D202 models only (page 4-185). Duct [A] ( ×2). ×3. Motor unit [A] ( ×8). D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-94...
  • Page 468 Waste Toner Bracket [A] ( ×4, washer × 1). Recycling shutter bracket [A] ( ×4). 4-95 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 469 Waste Toner  Spread paper on the floor to catch possible toner spills. 10. Recycling shutter solenoid [A] ( ×2, ×1). D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-96...

  • Page 470: Recycling Shutter

    Bracket [A] ( ×2, ×1, bearing × 1).  Place a sheet of paper underneath the bracket, and then put the bracket on the sheet. Otherwise, the grease applied to the gear in the bracket may adhere to the floor. 4-97 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 471 ×3, Gear × 1).  Place a sheet of paper underneath the recycling shutter unit, and then put the recycling shutter unit on the sheet. Otherwise, the grease applied to the gear in the unit may adhere to the floor. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-98...

  • Page 472: Transfer Unit

    Open the right cover. Close the transfer unit [A] Remove the clip of the transfer unit [A] and disconnect the connector. Slide the bearing in the blue arrow direction to release it from the frame of the main machine 4-99 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 473 Transfer Unit Open the transfer unit [A]. Release the arm of the transfer unit [A] ( ×1). Transfer unit [A] D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-100...

  • Page 474: Transfer Roller Unit

    If you have to turn the power on again before replacing the part, execute the SP again before replacing the part.  After replacing the Transfer roller unit, turn on the main power on. Open the right cover. Release the claws of the transfer roller unit [A]. Transfer roller unit [A] 4-101 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 475: Id Sensor

    Take a note of the characteristic value in the following red-dashed part on the new ID sensor. Turn the main power ON and enter SP mode. Input the characteristic value to SP3-331-061. Replacement Procedure Open the right cover. ID sensor [A] ( ×1, ×1) D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-102...

  • Page 476: Transfer Unit Open/Close Led

    Transfer Unit 4.11.4 TRANSFER UNIT OPEN/CLOSE LED Open the right cover. Guide plate [A] ( ×2) LED cover [A] ( ×1) Transfer unit open/close LED [A] ( ×1) 4-103 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 477: Temperature/Humidity Sensor

    Pull out the 1st and 2nd paper feed trays. Right lower cover [A] ( ×1) Inserting a driver from the frame hole, remove the screw of the temperature/humidity sensor [A] ( ×1) Temperature/humidity sensor [A] ( ×1, ×1) D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-104...

  • Page 478: Fusing Entrance Sensor

    Transfer Unit 4.11.6 FUSING ENTRANCE SENSOR Open the right cover. Fusing entrance sensor [A] with bracket ( ×1) Fusing entrance sensor [A] ( ×1) 4-105 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 479: Transfer Unit Open/Close Sensor

    Transfer Unit 4.11.7 TRANSFER UNIT OPEN/CLOSE SENSOR Open the right cover. Transfer unit open/close sensor [A] ( ×1, hooks) D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-106...

  • Page 480: Drive Unit

    Drum/Waste Toner Motor [A] ( ×4, ×1) 4.12.2 DEVELOPMENT MOTOR Rear right cover (page 4-16) Development Motor [A] ( ×4, ×1) 4.12.3 FUSING/PAPER EXIT MOTOR (D197/D199 ONLY) Rear right cover (page 4-16) Fusing/paper exit motor [A] ( ×4, ×1) 4-107 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 481: Fusing Motor (D200/D201/D202 Only)

    Fusing motor [A] ( ×4, ×1) 4.12.5 PAPER EXIT MOTOR (D200/D201/D202 ONLY) Rear right cover (page 4-16) Paper exit motor [A] ( ×2, ×1) 4.12.6 REGISTRATION MOTOR Rear right cover (page 4-16) Registration motor [A] ( ×2, ×1) D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-108...

  • Page 482: Paper Feed Motor

    ×2, ×1) 4.12.8 VERTICAL TRANSPORT MOTOR Rear lower cover (page 4-17) Vertical transport motor ( ×2, ×1) 4.12.9 TRANSFER ROLLER CONTACT MOTOR Front cover (page 4-10) Inner cover (page 4-26) Transfer roller contact motor [A] ( ×3, ×2) 4-109 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 483: Toner Hopper

    Toner supply housing (page 4-27) Controller box (page 4-177) Screws on the toner hopper [A] ( ×3) Gear [B] on the gearbox [A] ( ×1) Screws and tab on the gearbox [A] ( ×3, tab×1) Toner hopper [A] D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-110...
  • Page 484  Attach the toner supply pipe [A] before installing the gear box and toner hopper.  Fit the hole of the supply pipe to the pin [B] and then stabilize the pipe ( x1). 4-111 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 485: Toner Supply Motor

    ×1). Remove the gear [A] and part [B] from the gear box cover [C].  Make sure that the angle of the part [B] is as shown below when attaching the part [B] to the gear box cover. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-112...
  • Page 486 Drive Unit Gear box cover [A]. Remove the Toner supply motor [B] with its spacer from the gear box cover [A] ( ×2). Spacer [B] from toner supply motor [A]. 4-113 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 487: Fusing Unit

    3. Turn off and on the machine.  D197/D198/D199 When the fusing unit is used past its PM cycle, the fusing unit may break, causing a service call. Therefore, the machine displays a warning on the operation panel at 240K pages and stops at 260K pages.

  • Page 488: Fusing Unit

    Do not pull out the fusing unit now. The fusing unit is still connected to the machine.  When disconnecting the harness, hold the connector as shown below in order to avoid breaking the connector pins. Fusing unit connector cover [A] 4-115 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 489 (surrounded by red dashes in the diagram) and the frame of the fusing unit [B] together when installing.  The connector cover must be attached before screwing in the fusing unit. Connector [A] ( Pull out the fusing unit [A]. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-116...

  • Page 490: Fusing Entrance Guide Plate

    Fusing unit (page 4-114) Fusing entrance guide plate [A] ( Cleaning the Fusing Entrance Guide Plate Carefully remove toner adhering as shown in the diagram below with a dry cloth. Then, wipe with a cloth moistened with alcohol. 4-117 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 491: Fusing Exit Guide Plate

    Fusing Unit 4.13.3 FUSING EXIT GUIDE PLATE Fusing unit (page 4-114) Open the fusing exit guide plate [A].  Wipe clean with a dry cloth. Then wipe clean with a cloth dampened with alcohol. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-118...

  • Page 492: Fusing Upper Cover

     You must route the harnesses for the pressure roller temperature sensor and the fusing roller temperature sensor correctly when reassembling the fusing unit. See the notes when reassembling the fusing unit. (Notes When Reassembling the Fusing Unit) 4-119 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 493: Fusing Lower Cover

     You must route the harnesses for the pressure roller temperature sensor and the fusing roller temperature sensor correctly when reassembling the fusing unit. See the notes when reassembling the fusing unit. (Notes When Reassembling the Fusing Unit) D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-120...

  • Page 494: Heating Sleeve Belt Unit

    When replacing the heating sleeve belt unit at EM replacement, installing a fuse is not necessary. Do not use the fuse for EM replacement.  The new unit detection fuse packed with the heating sleeve belt unit is used to cancel SC544-02/554-02. Discard the fuse if these SCs did not occur. 4-121 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 495: Replacement

    Fusing Unit Replacement Fusing upper cover (page 4-119) Fusing lower cover (page 4-120) Two pressure springs ( Left and right frame ( x2 for each frame) Heating sleeve belt unit [A] D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-122...

  • Page 496: To Clear Sc544-02 Or Sc554-02

    Prepare a new fuse provided with the heating sleeve belt unit. Connect the fuse pins into the fusing unit connector. Route the harness of the fuse through the slit (arrow-pointed). 4-123 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 497: Pressure Roller And Pressure Roller Bearings4-124

    OFF. Then replace the pressure roller bearings and turn the main power ON. If you have to turn the power on again before replacing the part, execute the SP again before replacing the part. Replacement Heating sleeve belt unit (page 4-121) Pressure roller gear [A] (C-ring x1) D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-124...
  • Page 498 Fusing Unit Pressure roller rear bearing [A] Pressure roller front bearing [A] (C-ring x1) Pressure roller [A] 4-125 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 499: Thermostat Unit

    Thermostats [A] ( x2 for each thermostat) 4.13.9 FUSING ROLLER TEMPERATURE SENSOR Fusing lower cover (page 4-120) Fusing roller temperature sensors [A] 4.13.10 PRESSURE ROLLER TEMPERATURE SENSOR Fusing lower cover (page 4-120) Pressure roller temperature sensors ( x1, for each) D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-126...

  • Page 500: Fusing Thermopile

    Fusing Unit 4.13.11 FUSING THERMOPILE Fusing unit (page 4-114) Fusing thermopile unit [A] ( Fusing thermopiles [A] ( 4-127 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 501: Notes When Reassembling The Fusing Unit

    Harness [B] for the fusing roller temperature sensor has black, white, and blue wires. Routing starts from the bottom of the fusing unit, then the rear, and to the top. Harness route: when looking at the bottom of the fusing unit Harness route: when looking at the side of the fusing unit D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-128...

  • Page 502: Paper Exit

    Paper Exit 4.14 PAPER EXIT 4.14.1 PAPER EXIT UNIT Open the right cover. Fusing unit (page 4-114) Paper exit cover (page 4-23) Inner cover [A] ( ×2) Paper exit unit [A] ( ×1, ×1) 4-129 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 503: Paper Exit Switching Solenoid

    Paper Exit 4.14.2 PAPER EXIT SWITCHING SOLENOID Paper exit unit (page 4-129) Paper exit switching solenoid [A] ( ×2, ×1, ×1) D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-130...

  • Page 504: Paper Exit Sensor

    Paper Exit 4.14.3 PAPER EXIT SENSOR Paper exit unit (page 4-129) Feeler [A] Paper exit sensor with bracket [A] ( ×1, ×2) Paper exit sensor [A] (hooks, ×1, ×1) 4-131 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 505: Reverse Sensor

    Paper Exit 4.14.4 REVERSE SENSOR Paper exit unit (page 4-129) Reverse sensor with bracket [A] ( ×1) Reverse sensor [A] (hooks, ×1) D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-132...

  • Page 506: Paper Exit Full Sensor

    Paper Exit 4.14.5 PAPER EXIT FULL SENSOR Paper exit unit (page 4-129) Paper exit full sensor with bracket [A] ( ×1, ×1) Paper exit full sensor [A] (hooks, ×1) 4-133 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 507: Reverse Motor

    Paper Exit 4.14.6 REVERSE MOTOR Paper exit unit (page 4-129) Gear [A] Release the harness ( ×1, ×2,). Bearings[A] ( ×1) Reverse motor with bracket [A] ( ×3) D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-134...

  • Page 508: Fusing Exit Sensor

    Paper Exit Reverse motor [A] ( ×2, ×1) 4.14.7 FUSING EXIT SENSOR Paper exit unit (page 4-129) Fusing exit sensor [A] (hooks, ×1) 4-135 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 509: Paper Feed

    Pull out the 1st paper feed unit [A] slightly toward the front, and then take off the paper feed guide plate [B].  Release the rear side of the shaft first to remove the paper feed guide plate.  The following picture shows the rear side shape of the shaft. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-136...

  • Page 510: 2Nd Paper Feed Unit

    1st paper feed unit [A] ( 2nd Paper Feed Unit Right cover (page 4-20). Pull out the 2nd paper feed tray [A].  Depending on the model, remove the right lower cover or open the paper transport cover. Bracket [A] ( ×1) 4-137 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 511 The harness guide has a claw, so make sure that you do not break it when removing. Remove the paper feed guide plate [A].  Release the rear side of the shaft first to remove the paper feed guide plate. 2nd paper feed unit [A] ( ×2, D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-138...

  • Page 512: Paper Dust Collection Unit

    Paper Feed 4.15.2 PAPER DUST COLLECTION UNIT Open the right cover. Screw on the paper dust collection unit [A] ( ×1) Release the tab on the paper dust collection unit [A] ( ×1). 4-139 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 513 ×1).  The right side of the paper dust collection unit has a C-shaped cutout. Do not pull the unit by force during removal. When installing, open the transfer unit [A] to prevent the sheet [B] from breaking. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-140...

  • Page 514: Pick-Up Roller, Paper Feed Roller, Separation

    Paper Feed 4.15.3 PICK-UP ROLLER, PAPER FEED ROLLER, SEPARATION ROLLER, TORQUE LIMITER Roller holder [A] ( ×1) Pickup roller [A] Paper feed roller [A] Separation roller [A] ( ×1) 4-141 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 515 Paper Feed Torque limiter [A] D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-142...

  • Page 516: 1St / 2Nd Paper Feed Tray Lift Motor

    Paper Feed 4.15.4 1ST / 2ND PAPER FEED TRAY LIFT MOTOR HVPS (page 4-174) 1st paper feed tray lift motor [A] ( ×2, ×1) 2nd paper feed tray lift motor [A] ( ×2, ×1) 4-143 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 517: 1St / 2Nd Paper Feed Sensor

    Paper feed unit (page 4-136) Paper feed sensor bracket [A] ( ×1, ×1) Paper feed sensor [A] (hooks)  Make sure that the end of the spring on the sensor unit is in the hole. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-144...

  • Page 518: Vertical Transport Sensor

    Paper Feed 4.15.6 VERTICAL TRANSPORT SENSOR Paper feed unit (page 4-136) Vertical transport sensor unit [A] ( ×1, ×1) Vertical transport sensor [A] (hooks) 4-145 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 519: Limit Sensor

    4.15.8 1ST PAPER END SENSOR / 2ND PAPER END SENSOR  There is no difference in removal procedure between 1st paper end sensor and 2nd paper end sensor. Paper feed unit (page 4-136) Feeler [A] ( ×1) Paper end sensor [A] ( ×1) D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-146...
  • Page 520 Paper Feed After reinstalling the paper end sensor, check the operation of the actuator [A]. 4-147 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 521: Registration Sensor

    Paper Feed 4.15.9 REGISTRATION SENSOR Open the right cover (page 4-20). Transfer unit (page 4-99) Inner guide bracket [A] ( ×2) Remove the registration sensor (hooks, ×1, x1). D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-148...

  • Page 522: Duplex Unit

    Duplex Unit 4.16 DUPLEX UNIT 4.16.1 DUPLEX/BY-PASS MOTOR Right Cover (page 4-20) Duplex inner cover [A] ( ×4) Duplex/by-pass motor unit [A] ( ×3, ×1) Duplex/By-pass Motor [A] ( ×2) 4-149 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 523: Duplex Entrance Motor

    Duplex Unit 4.16.2 DUPLEX ENTRANCE MOTOR Right Cover (page 4-20) Duplex inner cover [A] ( ×4) Duplex entrance motor bracket [A] ( ×2, ×1) Duplex entrance motor [A] ( ×2) D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-150...

  • Page 524: Duplex Entrance Sensor

    Duplex Unit 4.16.3 DUPLEX ENTRANCE SENSOR Right Cover (page 4-20) Screws and stoppers for the paper transfer guide plate [A] ( ×2, ×1) Duplex inner entrance guide [A] Duplex outer entrance guide [A] ( ×8, ×1, ×1) 4-151 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 525 Duplex Unit Duplex entrance sensor [A] (hooks) D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-152...

  • Page 526: Duplex Exit Sensor

    Duplex Unit 4.16.4 DUPLEX EXIT SENSOR Open the right cover. Duplex exit sensor bracket [A] ( ×1, ×1) Duplex exit sensor [A] (hooks) 4-153 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 527: Bypass Tray Unit

    Bypass Tray Unit 4.17 BYPASS TRAY UNIT 4.17.1 BYPASS TRAY Open the right cover. Wire [A] ( ×1) Release two arms [A] [B] ( ×2). D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-154...
  • Page 528 Bypass Tray Unit Open the right cover wide. Paper transport guide [A] ( ×2) Harness ( ×1, ×1, ×1) Bypass tray [A] ( ×4) 4-155 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 529: Bypass Paper End Sensor

    Bypass Tray Unit 4.17.2 BYPASS PAPER END SENSOR Open the bypass tray [A]. Bypass paper end sensor cover [A] Bypass paper end sensor unit [A] ( ×1, ×1) D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-156...

  • Page 530: Bypass Pick-Up Roller

    Bypass Tray Unit Bypass paper end sensor [A] (hooks) 4.17.3 BYPASS PICK-UP ROLLER Open the bypass tray (page 4-154). Bypass pick-up roller [A] ( ×1) 4-157 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 531: Bypass Paper Feed Roller

    Bypass paper end sensor unit (page 4-156 "Bypass Paper End Sensor") Bypass paper feed roller [A] ( ×1) 4.17.5 BYPASS SEPARATION ROLLER Paper transport guide (page 4-154) Bypass separation roller [A] ( ×1) 4.17.6 TORQUE LIMITER Bypass separation roller (page 4-158) Torque limiter [A] D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-158...

  • Page 532: Bypass Width Sensor

    Six screws on the bypass tray [A] ( ×6). Release the hooks around the bypass tray [A]  There is a hook in the tray cover. Be careful not to damage it during removal or installation. Release the links. 4-159 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 533 Bypass Tray Unit Bypass tray upper cover [A] (pin x 1, Bypass width sensor [A] ( ×1, D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-160...

  • Page 534: Bypass Length Sensor

    Bypass Tray Unit  When installing, the holes must align as shown below. 4.17.8 BYPASS LENGTH SENSOR Bypass tray upper cover (page 4-159). Bypass length sensor [A] ( ×1, hooks) 4-161 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 535: Pcbs And Other Items

    PCBs and Other Items 4.18 PCBS AND OTHER ITEMS 4.18.1 OVERVIEW Around the Controller Box Controller Board HVPS D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-162...

  • Page 536: Around The Power Supply Box

    PCBs and Other Items Around the Power Supply Box 4-163 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 537: Ipu

    The FFC connector has a lock mechanism. Do not use force to pull it out. Controller rear cover (page 4-15) IPU Sub if SPDF is installed. IPU [A] ( ×4, ×9, ×1, USB×1) IPU Sub (If SPDF is installed) Controller rear cover (page 4-15) IPU Sub [A] ( ×3, ×2) D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-164...

  • Page 538: Bcu

    Keep NVRAMs (EEPROM) away from any objects that can cause static electricity. Static electricity can damage NVRAM data.  Make sure the serial number is input in the machine for the NVRAM data with SP5-811-004, if not, SC995-001 occurs 4-165 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 539: Replacing The Nvram (Eeprom) On The Bcu

    When the power is turned ON, SC195-00 appears, but continue with the following steps. Select the destination setting. (SP5-131-001) (JPN: 0, NA: 1, EU/AA/TWN/CHN: 2) 10. Check the machine serial number with SP5-811-004, and then set the machine serial number of SP5-811-001. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-166...

  • Page 540: Controller Board

    Turn OFF the main power switch Replace the controller board Turn ON the main power switch  Do not turn the main power ON after step 2, until after you replaced the board. Controller rear cover (page 4-15) HDD bracket (page 4-173) 4-167 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 541 PCBs and Other Items Controller bracket [A] ( ×5, ×2) Controller board ( ×4) Release the guide rail [A] D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-168...
  • Page 542 When installing a new controller board, Install a removed or a new NVRAM [C] so that the indentation [B] on the NVRAM corresponds with the mark [A] on the controller board. Incorrect installation of the NVRAM will damage both the controller board and NVRAM. 4-169 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 543: Nvram On The Controller Board

    [Receiver] in [User Tools/Counter] - [Facsimile Features] - [Reception Settings] - [Reception File Settings] - [Forwarding].  [Notify Destination] in [User Tools/Counter] - [Facsimile Features] - [Reception Settings] - [Reception File Settings] - [Store].  [Specify User] in [User Tools/Counter] - [Facsimile Features] - [Reception Settings] - D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-170...
  • Page 544 1. Change the SP settings for the operation panel.  SP5-748-101: (OpePanel Setting: Op Type Action Setting): Change bit 0 from “0” to “1”.  SP5-748-201: (OpePanel Setting: Cheetah Panel Connect Setting): Change the value from “0” to “1”. 4-171 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 545 6. If not, set it to the setting before replacement. 21. Execute the process control (SP3-011-001).  If a message tells you need an SD card to restore displays after the NV-RAM replacement, create a “SD card for restoration” and restore with the SD card. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-172...

  • Page 546: Hdd

    Even if you use an HDD that is already formatted, it is recommended that you re-initialize. Execute SP5-853-001 to install the fixed stamps. Execute SP5-846-052 to copy the address book from the SD card to the HDD. Turn off the machine, and then turn it back on. 4-173 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 547: Hvps

    PCBs and Other Items 4.18.6 HVPS Rear lower cover (page 4-17) HVPS [A] ( ×4, ×5) D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-174...

  • Page 548: Psu

    PCBs and Other Items 4.18.7 PSU Left cover (page 4-14) Bracket [A] ( ×8) PSU [A] ( ×5, ×7 for EU/AA) 4-175 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 549: Psu Fuse Location

    PCBs and Other Items PSU Fuse Location 4.18.8 HEATER BOARD Left cover (page 4-14) Heater board [A]( ×3, ×3) D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-176...

  • Page 550: Controller Box

    Rear lower cover (page 4-17) Release the clamps on the upper side of the controller box ( ×8). Release the clamps on the flank of the controller box ( ×4). Release the clamps in the controller box ( ×4). 4-177 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 551 PCBs and Other Items Remove the connectors on the IPU [A] ( ×10, USB×1). 10. Remove the FFC on the BCU [A]. 11. Relay connector [A] ( ×2, ×2) D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-178...

  • Page 552: Temperature Sensor

    PCBs and Other Items 12. Controller box [A] ( ×9) 4.18.10 TEMPERATURE SENSOR Open the transfer unit (page 4-99). Fusing unit (page 4-114). Temperature sensor ( ×1, ×2, ×1). 4-179 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 553: Fans/Filters

    Fans/Filters 4.19 FANS/FILTERS 4.19.1 ODOR FILTER Odor filter box [A] Odor filter [A] D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-180...

  • Page 554: Dust Filter

    Fans/Filters 4.19.2 DUST FILTER PCDU (page 4-72) Mount the dust filter on the duct.[A]  Attach the right side of the filter first when you mount it. 4-181 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 555: Development Exhaust Fan

    Fans/Filters 4.19.3 DEVELOPMENT EXHAUST FAN Left cover (page 4-14) Bracket [A] ( ×8) Development exhaust fan with duct [A] ( ×2, ×1) Dismantle the duct [A] ( ×4) D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-182...

  • Page 556: Paper Exit Cooling Fan

    4.19.4 PAPER EXIT COOLING FAN Main power switch cover (page 4-22) Paper exit cooling fan [A] ( ×2, ×1, ×2)  Pay attention to the direction of the fan when installing. The decal pasted on the fan must face the inside. 4-183 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 557: Fusing Fan

    Fusing exhaust heat fan [A] with duct ( ×2, ×1, ×1) Fusing exhaust heat fan [A] ( ×4)  Pay attention to the direction of the fan when installing. The decal pasted on the fan must face the outside. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-184...

  • Page 558: Development Bearing Cooling Fan

    Fans/Filters 4.19.6 DEVELOPMENT BEARING COOLING FAN (D200/D201/D202 ONLY) Rear lower cover (page 4-17) Development bearing cooling fan with duct [A] ( ×2, ×1) Dismantle the duct [A] ( ×4) Development bearing cooling fan [A] 4-185 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 559: Psu Cooling Fan (D200/D201/D202 Only)

    4.19.7 PSU COOLING FAN (D200/D201/D202 ONLY) Left cover (page 4-14) PSU cooling fan [A] ( ×2,  Pay attention to the direction of the fan when installing. The decal pasted on the fan must face the inside. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-186...

  • Page 560: Adjustment After Replacement

    Check the leading edge registration [A] for each paper feed station, and adjust them using SP1-001. Tray SP No. Threshold Tray1: Thin SP1-001-001 4.2 ± 1.5 mm Tray1: Plain SP1-001-002 Tray1: MidThick SP1-001-003 Tray1: Thick1 SP1-001-004 Tray1: Thick2 SP1-001-005 Tray1: Thick3 SP1-001-006 Tray1: Thick4 SP1-001-007 4-187 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 561 Duplex: Thin SP1-001-022 4.2 ± 1.5 mm Duplex: Plain SP1-001-023 Duplex: MidThick SP1-001-024 Duplex: Thick1 SP1-001-025 Duplex: Thick2 SP1-001-026 Duplex: Thick3 SP1-001-027 Tray1: Thin: 1200 SP1-001-028 4.2 ± 1.5 mm Tray1: Plain: 1200 SP1-001-029 Tray1: MidThick: SP1-001-030 1200 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-188...
  • Page 562 SP1-001-038 1200 Tray2: Thick2: SP1-001-039 1200 Tray2: Thick3: SP1-001-040 1200 Tray2: Thick4: SP1-001-041 1200 Bypass: Thin: 1200 SP1-001-042 4.2 ± 1.5 mm Bypass: Plain: SP1-001-043 1200 Bypass: MidThick: SP1-001-044 1200 Bypass: Thick1: SP1-001-045 1200 Bypass: Thick2: SP1-001-046 1200 4-189 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 563 SP No. Threshold Bypass: Thick3: SP1-001-047 1200 Bypass: Thick4: SP1-001-048 1200 Duplex: Thin: 1200 SP1-001-049 4.2 ± 1.5 mm Duplex: Plain: 1200 SP1-001-050 Duplex: MidThick: SP1-001-051 1200 Duplex: Thick1: SP1-001-052 1200 Duplex: Thick2: SP1-001-053 1200 Duplex: Thick3: SP1-001-054 1200 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-190...

  • Page 564: Blank Margin

    B: Right Edge Blank Margin C: Leading Edge Blank Margin D: Left Edge Blank Margin Check the trailing edge [A], right edge [B], leading edge [C], left edge [D] blank margins, and adjust them using the following SP modes. 4-191 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 565 S Size: Thick Duplex: Left Edge SP2-103-014 -2.0 ±1.5 mm Thick Duplex: Right Edge: SP2-103-015 2.0 +2.5 /-1.5 mm Thick Duplex Trail. L Size:Thin SP2-103-016 Duplex Trail. M Size:Thin SP2-103-017 -4.0 ± 4.0 mm Duplex Trail. S Size:Thin SP2-103-018 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-192...

  • Page 566: Main Scan Magnification

    If lines slant down to the left [A], paste one or two sheets on the front side.  If lines slant down to the right [B], paste one or two sheets at each position on the rear side.  Adjustable amount: 0.5mm – 0.6mm/sheet 4-193 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 567 Adjustment after Replacement Do step 1 and 2 again to check that there is no parallelogram image. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-194...

  • Page 568: Scanning

    Place the test chart on the exposure glass and make a copy from one of the feed stations. Check the leading edge and side-to-side registration, and adjust them using the following SP modes if necessary. SP No. SP Name Adjustment Range SP4-010-001 Sub Scan Registration Adj ±2.0 mm SP4-011-001 Main Scan Reg ±2.5 mm 4-195 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 569: Magnification

    Place the test chart on the exposure glass and make a copy from one of the feed stations. Check the magnification ratio and adjust using the following SP mode if necessary. SP No. SP Name Adjustment Range SP4-008-001 Sub Scan Magnification ±1.0 % D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-196...

  • Page 570: Scanner Wire

    SP6-006-002 ±3.0 mm Rear ADF Adjustment Leading Edge SP6-006-003 ±5.0 mm Registration: Front ADF Adjustment Leading Edge SP6-006-004 ±5.0 mm Registration: Rear ADF Adjustment Buckle: Duplex SP6-006-005 ±5.0 mm Front SP6-006-006 ADF Adjustment Buckle: Duplex Rear ±5.0 mm 4-197 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 571: Sub Scan Magnification

    Place the temporary test chart on the ADF and make a copy from one of the feed stations. Check the magnification, and adjust using the following SP modes if necessary. SP No. SP Name Adjustment Range SP6-017-001 DF Magnification Adj. ±5.0 % D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-198...

  • Page 572: Touch Screen Calibration

    Use a pointed (not sharp!) tool to press the mark (+) at the upper left of the screen. Press in order the lower right, lower left, middle, and upper right of the screen (+). Press [[#] OK] on the screen (or press [#] on the ten-key pad) to save. 4-199 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 573 Press the points (upper left, lower left, upper right and lower right) and confirm that each value is within ±5 dots. 10. Press [[#] Exit] on the screen (or press [#] on the ten-key pad) to close the “Self Diagnostic Menu”. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 4-200...

  • Page 574: System Maintenance

    Adjustment after Replacement SYSTEM MAINTENANCE R E V I S I O N H I S T O RY P a ge D a t e A d de d /U pd at e d /N ew 1/19/2015 SP3-701-142 1/15/2015 SP5-507-081 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 576: Service Program Mode

    Select one of the Service Program modes (System, Printer, Scanner, or Fax) from the touch panel as shown in the diagram below after you access the SP mode. This section explains the functions of the System/Printer/Scanner SP modes. Refer to the Fax service manual for the Fax SP modes. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 577: Sp Mode Button Summary

    Mode (highlighted) in the copy window to return to the SP mode screen, Enter the SP code directly with the number keys if you know the SP number. Then press [#]. The required SP Mode number will be highlighted when pressing [#]. If not, just press the required SP Mode number.) D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 578: Switching Between Sp Mode And Copy Mode For Test Printing

    Use the center touch-panel buttons to scroll to the number and title of the item that you want to set and press it. The small entry box on the right activates and shows the below default or the current settings. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 579: Exiting Service Mode

    The CE can service the machine and turn the machine power switch off and on. It is not necessary to ask the Administrator to log in again each time the main power switch is turned on. Go into the SP mode and set SP5-169 to "1" if you must use the printer bit switches. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 580: Pm Counter/ Firmware Update

    PM Counter and Firmware Update can be entered in the SP mode main screen.  PM Counter: PM counters for each PM part  Firmware Update: Immediate remote update and remote update at next visit <How to Check the PM Counter> Enter the SP mode, and then press [PM Counter]. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 581 Service Program Mode Press [Estimated Usage Rate/Estimated Remain Days]. You can see the “Remaining Days for each part”. <How to Use the Firmware Update> For details about how to use the Firmware Update, refer to page 5-446 "Package Firmware Update". D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 582: Remarks

    Middle Thick: 82-105 g/m , 21.9-28lb. Thick Paper1: 106-157 g/m , 28.3-41.9lb. N: Normal paper Paper Type MTH: Middle thick paper TH: Thick paper P: Paper tray Paper Feed Station B: By-pass table S: Simplex Print Mode D: Duplex D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 583: Others

    "ENG" and "CTL" show which NVRAM contains the data.  *ENG: NVRAM on the BCU board  *CTL: NVRAM on the controller board This denotes a "Special Service Program" mode setting. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 584: Sp Mode Tables - Sp1000

    [-9.0 to 9.0 / 0.0 / 0.1mm/step] 1-001-013 Tray2: Thick 3 [-9.0 to 9.0 / 0.0 / 0.1mm/step] 1-001-014 Tray2: Thick 4 [-9.0 to 9.0 / 0.0 / 0.1mm/step] 1-001-015 By-pass: Thin [-9.0 to 9.0 / 0.0 / 0.1mm/step] D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 585 [-9.0 to 9.0 / 0.0 / 0.1mm/step] 1-001-036 Tray2: Plain:1200 [-9.0 to 9.0 / 0.0 / 0.1mm/step] 1-001-037 Tray2: Mid-thick:1200 [-9.0 to 9.0 / 0.0 / 0.1mm/step] 1-001-038 Tray2: Thick 1:1200 [-9.0 to 9.0 / 0.0 / 0.1mm/step] D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-10...
  • Page 586 [-9.0 to 9.0 / 0.0 / 0.1mm/step] 1-001-052 Duplex: Thick 1:1200 [-9.0 to 9.0 / 0.0 / 0.1mm/step] 1-001-053 Duplex: Thick 2:1200 [-9.0 to 9.0 / 0.0 / 0.1mm/step] 1-001-054 Duplex: Thick 3:1200 [-9.0 to 9.0 / 0.0 / 0.1mm/step] 5-11 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 587 [-9.0 to 9.0 / 0.0 / 0.1mm/step] 1-001-070 Tray4: Plain [-9.0 to 9.0 / 0.0 / 0.1mm/step] 1-001-071 Tray4: Mid-thick [-9.0 to 9.0 / 0.0 / 0.1mm/step] 1-001-072 Tray4: Thick 1 [-9.0 to 9.0 / 0.0 / 0.1mm/step] D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-12...
  • Page 588 1-001-089 Tray5(LCT): Thick 4 [-9.0 to 9.0 / 0.0 / 0.1mm/step] 1-001-090 Tray5(LCT): Thin:1200 [-9.0 to 9.0 / 0.0 / 0.1mm/step] 1-001-091 Tray5(LCT): Plain:1200 [-9.0 to 9.0 / 0.0 / 0.1mm/step] Tray5(LCT): 1-001-092 [-9.0 to 9.0 / 0.0 / 0.1mm/step] Mid-thick:1200 5-13 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 589 1-002-001 By-pass Tray *ENG 1-002-002 Paper Tray 1 *ENG 1-002-003 Paper Tray 2 *ENG 1-002-004 Paper Tray 3 *ENG [-4.0 to 4.0 / 0.0 / 0.1mm/step] 1-002-005 Paper Tray 4 *ENG 1-002-006 Duplex *ENG 1-002-007 Large Capacity Tray *ENG D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-14...
  • Page 590 [-4.0 to 5.0 / 0.0 / 0.1mm/step] 1-003-018 Paper Tray1: Plain:1200 [-4.0 to 5.0 / 0.0 / 0.1mm/step] Paper Tray 1: 1-003-019 [-4.0 to 5.0 / 0.0 / 0.1mm/step] Mid-thick:1200 Paper Tray1: 1-003-020 [-4.0 to 5.0 / -2.0 / 0.1mm/step] Thick1:1200 5-15 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 591 [-4.0 to 5.0 / -1.0 / 0.1mm/step] 1-003-029 Duplex:Thin:1200 [-4.0 to 5.0 / 0.0/ 0.1mm/step] 1-003-030 Duplex:Plain:1200 [-4.0 to 5.0 / 0.0 / 0.1mm/step] 1-003-031 Duplex: Mid-thick:1200 [-4.0 to 5.0 / 0.0 / 0.1mm/step] 1-003-032 Duplex:Thick1:1200 [-4.0 to 5.0 / -1.0 / 0.1mm/step] D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-16...
  • Page 592 Select “1: ON” to prevent the leading edge registration shifting. The side effect of turning on this SP is making some noise. [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] Registration Gear 1-009-001 *ENG 0:OFF Backlash Cut 1:ON 5-17 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 593 [Flicker Control] 1-101-030 Flicker Control *ENG [0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step] Extends the control cycle to make the flicker less noticeable. 0: Normal (default) 1: Flicker control mode (Use this SP if the flicker is occurred.) D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-18...
  • Page 594 [100 to 180 / * / 1deg/step] * The default is different with models. Plain1:BW:Center *ENG D197/D198: 123 D199/D200: 130 1-105-003 D201/D202: 147 Paper through target temperature: Standard paper 1: BW: center Fusing malfunction might improve by setting value larger.
  • Page 595 [100 to 180 / * / 1deg/step] * The default is different with models. M-thick:BW:Center *ENG D197/D198: 140 D199/D200: 143 1-105-015 D201/D202: 157 Paper through target temperature: middle thick paper: BW: center Fusing malfunction might improve by setting value larger.
  • Page 596 [100 to 180 / 145 / 1deg/step] Speed Paper through target temperature: special paper 2: BW: center 1-105-057 Fusing malfunction might improve by setting value larger. Paper curl might improve by setting value smaller. Adjusting range is +/- 5 deg. celsius. 5-21 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 597 [100 to 180 / 115 / 1deg/step] Speed Paper through target temperature: middle thick paper: BW: center: low 1-105-111 speed Fusing malfunction might improve by setting value larger. Paper curl might improve by setting value smaller. Adjusting range is +/- 5 deg. celsius. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-22...
  • Page 598 [100 to 180 / 110 / 1deg/step] Paper through target temperature: Standard paper 2: coat: center 1-105-127 Fusing malfunction might improve by setting value larger. Paper curl might improve by setting value smaller. Adjusting range is +/- 5 deg. celsius. 5-23 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 599 [100 to 180 / 140 / 1deg/step] Paper through target temperature: thick paper 4: BW: center 1-105-141 Fusing malfunction might improve by setting value larger. Paper curl might improve by setting value smaller. Adjusting range is +/- 5 deg. celsius. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-24...
  • Page 600 [-10 to 250 / 0 / 1deg/step] Displays the temperature of the hot 1-106-004 Press End roller detected by the thermistors at the ends of the pressure roller. 5-25 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 601 [0 to 200 / * / 1/step] * The default is different with Correction Formula 1-116-002 *ENG models. Judge Temp D197: 102 D198/D199/D200/D201/D202: 97 Heat Gap Correction 1-116-003 *ENG [0 to 200 / 0 / 1/step] Temp [0 to 500 / * / 1 sec/step]...
  • Page 602 [-100 to 100 / 10 / 1/step] * The default is different with Paper Thickness models. 1-116-074 Coefficient:Energy *ENG D197/D198/D199/D200 Saving (NA/TWN)/D201/ D202: 30 D200 (EU/AS/CHN/KOR): 100 1133 [Voltage Detection] [0.0 to 350.0 / * / 0.1V/step] * The default is different with regions.
  • Page 603 Display detailed conditions when an SC occurs. Displayed content is temp.: center: occurred time. Press Roller:End Det1 *ENG [-5 to 300 / 0 / 1deg/step] 1-141-104 Display detailed conditions when an SC occurs. Displayed content is temp.: edge: occurred time. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-28...
  • Page 604 2 cycle a head of occurred time. Press Roller:End Det3 *ENG [-5 to 300 / 0 / 1deg/step] 1-141-204 Display detailed conditions when an SC occurs. Displayed content is temp.: edge: 2 cycle a head of occurred time. 5-29 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 605 [0 to 240 / 60 / 1sec/step] Heat Center Target 1-153-005 [100 to 180 / 130 / 1deg/step] Temp 1-153-006 Heat End Target Temp [100 to 180 / 130 / 1deg/step] 1-153-007 Press Target Temp [0 to 200 / 0 / 1deg/step] D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-30...
  • Page 606 1: OFF 1-154-005 Heater ON Timing *ENG [0 to 250 / 0 / 10msec/step] [0 to 250 / * / 1deg/step] * The default is different with models. D197: 185 Overshoot Prevent 1-154-006 *ENG D198: 185 Temp.:SC D199: 185 D200: 195...
  • Page 607 [Fan ON/OFF Switch Set] [0 to 1/ 0 / 1 /step] Toner Bottle *ENG 0: Off (Stop) 1: On (Rotation) 1-955-022 Specifies the movement of development bearing Cooling Fan. This SP is only for D197, D198, and D199. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-32...

  • Page 608: Sp Mode Tables - Sp2000

    Adjusts trimming margine at the trailing edge for the sub scan.  Value increase: Trim becomes wider. 2-103-002  Value decrease: Trim becomes narrower. When using the printer mode, the margin setting of the printer mode is prior to this setting. 5-33 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 609 Adjusts trimming margine at the trailing edge on the 2nd side for sub scan when using middle size paper. Duplex Trail. S Size [-4.0 to 4.0 / 0.6 / 0.1mm/step] 2-103-008 Adjusts trimming margine at the trailing edge on the 2nd side for sub scan when using small size paper. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-34...
  • Page 610 Adjusts trimming margine at the right edge on the 2nd side for main scan when using thick paper. Duplex Trail. L Size:Thin [-4.0 to 4.0 / 1.0 / 0.1mm/step] 2-103-016 Adjusts trimming margine at the trailing edge on the 2nd side for sub scan when using large thin paper. 5-35 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 611 [Image Parameter] DFU 2107 For design use. Do not change. 2-107-001 Image Gamma Flag *ENG [0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step] 2-107-002 Shading Correction Flag *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-36...
  • Page 612 Argyle P : L Full Dot Pattern 1dot Ind. Pttrn. All White Pattern 2dot Ind. Pttrn. Density [0 to 15 / 15 / 1/step] Sets test patterns density. 2-109-006  Value increase: Density becomes darker.  Value decrease: Density becomes lighter. 5-37 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 613 Value increase: Density becomes darker.  Value decrease: Density becomes lighter. [Shad. Correct Setting] DFU 2152 For design use. Do not change. 2-152-001 Standard Speed *ENG 2-152-005 Middle Speed *ENG [50.0 to 150.0 / 100.0 / 0.1%/step] 2-152-009 Low Speed *ENG D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-38...
  • Page 614 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled Moderate temperature [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / -] 2-970-005 and humidity 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled High-temperature and [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / -] 2-970-006 high-humidity 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled 5-39 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 615 Forced CPM Down Thresh: No Duty *ENG [0 to 5000 / 0 / 1page/step] Control: ML 2-990-102 Sets the threshold for the CPM down in ML condition when the imaging duty is not restricted. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-40...
  • Page 616 SP Mode Tables - SP2000 Forced CPM Down Thresh: No Duty *ENG [0 to 5000 / 0 / 1page/step] Control: HH 2-990-103 Sets the threshold for the CPM down in HH condition when imaging duty is not restricted. 5-41 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 617: Sp Mode Tables - Sp3000

    Displays the result before the last 4 result of the process control execution. History:Last 6 *ENG [0 to 99 / 0 / 1/step] 3-012-006 Displays the result before the last 5 result of the process control execution. 3-012-007 History:Last 7 *ENG [0 to 99 / 0 / 1/step] D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-42...

  • Page 618: Sp3-012 Display Result Detail

    Vsg_reg < Min (Max) (regular reflect) 20 or more: ID Sensor output error ID Sensor Vsg_dif < Min(Max) (diffusion reflect) ID Sensor offset Voltage error Voffset_reg > Max (regular reflect) ID Sensor offset Voltage error Voffset_dif > Max (diffusion reflect) 5-43 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 619 3-030-101 Init Coverage: K DFU *ENG [0 to 2147483647 / 0 / 1%/ step] For design use. Do not change. 3-030-111 Total DC: Dev: K *ENG [0 to 2147483647 / 0 / 1%/step] For design use. Do not change. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-44...
  • Page 620 3-072-001 Execute Check [Execute] [T Sensor Measurement Value:] Displays TD sensor output voltage (mu count) when SP3-072-001 is 3073 executed. Normal value is approximately 6000 to 6200. 3-073-001 mu count *ENG [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1/step] 5-45 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 621 *ENG 1:Vt Only 3-100-003 2:Page Counter Only Selects the toner end detection method. [Toner Status :Disp] 3101 Displays remaining toner. [0 to 2 / 2 / 1/step] 2: Full 3-101-001 K *ENG 1: Near end 0: Toner end D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-46...
  • Page 622 [-999.0 to 0 / -280.0 / 0.1 3-205-061 BD Cnv Coef: K *ENG count/g/m /step] 3-205-071 AH Cnv Coef: K *ENG [0 to 0.9999 / 0 / 0.0001 /step] 3-205-101 Bulk Density: K *ENG [-5.00 to 5.00 / 0 / 0.01V/step] 5-47 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 623 Displays image area (K) for the latest page. 3-250-001 ImgArea *ENG [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1cm /step] 3251 [DotCoverage :Disp] DotCoverage *ENG [0.00 to 100.00 / 0.00 / 0.01%/step] 3-251-001 Displays image area rate (K) for the latest page. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-48...
  • Page 624 [0.00 to 5.50 / 0.00 / 0.01V/step] 3310 [ID.Sens :Voffset] Voffset TM(Front) *ENG [0.00 to 5.50 / 0.00 / 0.01V/step] Displays the regular reflection output of ID sensor when the LED of the ID 3-310-021 sensor is off. Normal condition: Approximately 0.1V or less. 5-49 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 625 3-322-001 Ifsg *ENG [0.0 to 50.0 / 10.0 / 0.001mA/step] [Adjusted Ifsg] 3322 Displays the minimum LED current of the ID sensor for the Vsg adjustment. 3-322-011 Ifsg Min *ENG [0.0 to 50.0 / 27.0 / 0.001mA/step] D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-50...
  • Page 626 3-323-003 Latest 3 *ENG 3-323-004 Latest 4 *ENG 3-323-005 Latest 5 *ENG [0 to 9 / 0 / 1/step] 3-323-006 Latest 6 *ENG 3-323-007 Latest 7 *ENG 3-323-008 Latest 8 *ENG 3-323-009 Latest 9 *ENG 3-323-010 Latest 10 *ENG 5-51 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 627 [DeveloperWeight] DFU 3420 For design use. Do not change. 3-420-001 Total_Weight *ENG [50 to 2000 / 315 / 1g/step] [TnrSplyAbility] DFU 3421 For design use. Do not change. [0.001 to 2.000 / 0.670 / 3-421-001 K *ENG 0.001mg/msec] D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-52...
  • Page 628 *ENG 0: OFF 3-500-002 1: ON Sets execution judge to OFF of electric potential control. [0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step] Init TD Sensor DFU *ENG 0: OFF 3-500-004 1: ON For design use. Do not change. 5-53 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 629 [0.0 to 99.0 / 4.3 / 0.1g/m /step] 3-529-004 Max Cnt Threshold *ENG [0 to 99 / 2 / 1counts/step] 3-529-005 Exe Cnt [0 to 255 / 0 / 1counts/step] 3-529-006 Page Cnt:BW *ENG [0 to 5000 / 0 / 1sheet/step] D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-54...
  • Page 630 [0 to 99 / 10 / 1deg/step] Relative Humidity 3-531-003 *ENG [0 to 99 / 50 / 1%RH/step] Range Absolute Humidity 3-531-004 *ENG [0 to 99 / 6 / 1g/m /step] Range Maximum Execution 3-531-005 *ENG [0 to 99 / 10 / 1times/step] Number 5-55 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 631 Displays number of sheets interval for the job end process control (BW). [0.00 to 1.00 / 0.50 / 0.01/step] 3-534-003 Corr(Short):BW DFU *ENG For design use. Do not change. [0.00 to 1.00 / 1.00 / 0.01/step] 3-534-004 Corr(Mid):BW DFU *ENG For design use. Do not change. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-56...
  • Page 632 [0 to 255 / 51 / 1cm^2] BK:MM Refresh Threshold: 3-550-101 *ENG [0 to 255 / 51 / 1cm^2] BK:LL Refresh Threshold: 3-550-102 *ENG [0 to 255 / 51 / 1cm^2] BK:ML Refresh Threshold: 3-550-103 *ENG [0 to 255 / 51 / 1cm^2] BK:HH 5-57 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 633 [Dev DC Control] Std Speed *ENG [200 to 800 / 590 / 1-V/step] 3-612-001 Displays the development bias decided by the process control. Now:Std Speed: K [200 to 800 / 690 / 1-V/step] 3-612-201 Displays the actual development bias. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-58...
  • Page 634 Decreasing value: Decreases the value of upper limit for LD power. LowerLimit *ENG [0 to 100 / 67 / 1%/step] 3-623-111  Increasing value: Increases the value of lower limit for LD power.  Decreasing value: Decreases the value of lower limit for LD power. 5-59 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 635 Displays latest Vsdp value. 3-631-001 Current *ENG [0 to 5.50 / 0 / 0.01V/step] [New Unit Detection] 3700 Enables or disables the new unit detection. [0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step] 3-700-001 ON/OFF Setting *ENG 1: Enable 0: Disable D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-60...
  • Page 636 [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] Manual New Unit Set 3-701-206 ADF:Pick-up Roller *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 3-701-207 ADF:Feeding Belt *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 3-701-208 ADF:Reverse Roller *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 5-61 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 637  Decreasing value: Increases the number of days before displaying the message once the machine detects that the waste toner bottle is nearly full. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-62...

  • Page 638: Sp Mode Tables - Sp4000

    4012  Do not adjust unless the customer desires a scanner margin greater than the printer margin. These settings are adjusted to erase shadows caused by the gap between the original and the scale of the scanner unit. 5-63 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 639 Sets mask area to erase scale shadow of main scan leading edge when scanning with ADF. ADF: Left *ENG [0.0 to 3.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step] 4-012-008 Sets mask area to erase scale shadow of main scan trailing edge when scanning with ADF. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-64...
  • Page 640 Sets ON/OFF DF: Rear (2nd side) dust detection setting. [0 to 8 / 4 / 1/step] Correction Level:Rear 0:Lowest level 8:Highest level 4-020-012 Sets DF: Rear (2nd side) dust detection level. As the value enlarges, it is easier to detect. 5-65 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 641 Select ON/OFF for low CPP edge correction with 1200dpi 1bit. 4301 [Operation Check APS Sensor] [0 to 255 / 0 / 1/step] Operation Check APS 0: Not detected Sensor 4-301-001 1: Detected SP for testing APS Sensor function. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-66...
  • Page 642 A4/LT size paper, regardless of whether the paper is loaded in portrait or landscape orientation.  When “0: JA” or “1: NA” is set at SP5-131-001, “3: 8K 16K series” can not be selected with SP4-305-001. 5-67 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 643 Decreasing value: LED lamp lights earlier. LED PWM Duty *ENG [0 to 100 / 45 / 1/step] Adjusts lamp light timing for scan size detection. 4-309-004  Increasing value: Increases the light quantity.  Decreasing value: Decreases the light quantity. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-68...
  • Page 644 S2: Original width is within 215.9 mm to 254mm. S2:B [0 to 255 / 0 / 1digit/step] Displays the Blue density of the image (Center) previously scanned using 4-310-006 original size detection. S2: Original width is within 215.9 mm to 254mm. 5-69 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 645 Switches On/OFF for Intermittent Shading when scanning in BW mode (Simplex/Duplex). 4351 [Intermittent Shading : FC] [0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step] Switch On/Off 0: Every time shading 4-351-001 1: Interval shading Selects shading operation for color scanning. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-70...
  • Page 646 Sets mask area to erase original shadow of main scan leading edge when scanning with ADF. ADF:Main:TEdge(Front) *ENG [0.0 to 3.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step] 4-400-008 Sets mask area to erase original shadow of main scan trailing edge when scanning with ADF. 5-71 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 647 Switches unjust copy output pattern density for scan. As the value enlarges, gets deeper. Fax Operation *ENG [0 to 3 / 3 / 1/step] 4-429-003 Switches unjust copy output pattern density for fax. As the value enlarges, gets deeper. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-72...
  • Page 648 4-609-002  Value decrease: Increases red.  Gray balance adjustment value of DF scan can be corrected with SP4-688-001/002: DF density adjust. (These SPs can adjust the density difference correction between Book scanning and DF face side scanning.) 5-73 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 649 4-610-002  Value decrease: Increases green.  Gray balance adjustment value of DF scan can be corrected with SP4-688-001/002: DF density adjust. (These SPs can adjust the density difference correction between Book scanning and DF face side scanning.) D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-74...
  • Page 650 4-611-002  Value decrease: Increases blue.  Gray balance adjustment value of DF scan can be corrected with SP4-688-001/002: DF density adjust. (These SPs can adjust the density difference correction between Book scanning and DF face side scanning.) 5-75 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 651 SSCG correction does not work correctly.  SSCG correction is a control technology to correct the image quality deterioration as a side effect of SSCG (Safety Standard Control Technology) to reduce electromagnetic radiation noise. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-76...
  • Page 652 Bit3: gain abnormal (F side /GREEN/EVEN pixel) Bit2: gain abnormal (F side /GREEN/ODD pixel) Bit1: gain abnormal (F side /BLUE/EVEN pixel) Bit0: gain abnormal (F side /BLUE/ODD pixel) [format] binary Scan adjust error (F side/White level) flag= (b15,b14,b13,b12,b11,b10,b9,b8,b7,b6,b5,b4,b3,b2,b1,b0) 5-77 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 653 Bit4: SSCG correction error (Fside/RED/ODD Pixel) 4-646-003 Bit3: SSCG correction error (Fside/GREEN/EVEN Pixel) Bit2: SSCG correction error (Fside/GREEN/ODD Pixel) Bit1: SSCG correction error (Fside/BLUE/EVEN Pixel) Bit0: SSCG correction error (Fside/BLUE/ODD Pixel) [format] binary Scan adjust error (F side/SSCG correction) flag= (b7,b6,b5,b4,b3,b2,b1,b0) D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-78...
  • Page 654 Value increase: ADF density deeper.  Value decrease: ADF density thinner. 4688 [Scan Image Density Adjustment] 1-pass DF *ENG [80 to 120 / 103 / 1 %/step] 4-688-002 For the SPDF only. Adjusts density difference between Book and ADF. 5-79 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 655 (2nd side) of an original in DF scanning mode. 4-797-002 When scanning a darker original in DF scanning mode, the background of the original may appear on the copy. In such a case, increase this value to make the background disappear. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-80...
  • Page 656 Shading Data *ENG [ 512 to 1023 / 800 / 1digit/step] Displays shading date for original size detection with CCD at the first 4-860-001 scaning after main power switch “on”. Every scan job renews the value of shading data. 5-81 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 657 [Adj Txt/Photo Recog Level] High Compression PDF [0 to 2 / 1 / 1/step] 4-994-001 Adjusts the guide for recognizing the text area or image area. 0: Prior to text recognition , 1: Basic, 2: Prior to image recognition D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-82...
  • Page 658 Selects the threshold level of the original background density. Increasing 4-996-001 this threshold level machine easily judge that an original is white. For example, increasing this value allows the machine to determine the colored background of originals scanned as a white background. 5-83 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 659: Sp Mode Tables - Sp5000-1

    [1 to 255 / 0 / 1/step] [mm/inch Display Selection] 5024 Display units (mm or inch) for custom paper sizes. [0 or 1 / 1 (USA), 0 (Europe/Asia) / 1/step] 5-024-001 0:mm 1:inch *CTL 0: mm 1: inch D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-84...
  • Page 660 *CTL 0: OFF 1: ON [Toner Remaining Icon Display Change] 5061 Display or does not display the remaining toner display icon on the LCD. [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 5-061-001 *CTL 0: No display 1: Display 5-85 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 661 0: No display 1: Display [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 5-062-025 Development Filter *CTL 0: No display 1: Display [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] Bearing: Development 5-062-028 *CTL 0: No display Screw 1: Display D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-86...
  • Page 662 ADF Reverse Roller *CTL 0: No display 1: Display [PM Parts Display] 5066 Display or does not display the “PM parts” button on the LCD. [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 5-066-001 *CTL 0: No display 1: Display 5-87 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 663 [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 5-067-022 Stripper *CTL 0: Service 1: User [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 5-067-023 #Dev Unit *CTL 0: Service 1: User [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 5-067-024 Developer *CTL 0: Service 1: User D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-88...
  • Page 664 *CTL 0: Service 1: User [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 5-067-207 ADF Paper Supply Belt *CTL 0: Service 1: User [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 5-067-208 ADF Reverse Roller *CTL 0: Service 1: User 5-89 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 665 2: Browser application [0 to 0xFFFF FFFF/ 0 / 1/step] 5-074-092 Product ID *CTL Sets the application product ID. [0 to 255 / 0 / 1/step] 5-074-093 Application Screen ID *CTL Sets the display category of the extended application. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-90...
  • Page 666 [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 5-083-002 Waste Toner Near End *CTL 0: OFF 1: ON [Timer Set] 5101 Enables or disables the low power mode. [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 5-101-104 Low Power Set *CTL 0: Disable 1: Enable 5-91 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 667 [Optional Counter I/F] 5114 Sets this SP for connecting to an optional counter which uses MF key card I/F. [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 5-114-001 MF Key Card Extension *CTL 0: Not installed 1: Installed (scanning accounting) D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-92...
  • Page 668 0: Feed 1: Exit [Set F-size Document] 5126 Selects the paper size for the F-size original. [0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step] 0: 8 1/2 x 13 5-126-001 - 1: 8 1/4 x 13 2: 8 x 13 5-93 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 669 1: ON [App. Switch Method] 5162 Determines whether the application screen is switched with a hardware switch or software switch. [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 5-162-001 - *CTL 0: Soft Key Set 1: Hard Key Set D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-94...
  • Page 670 [0 or 1 / 1 (NA), 0 (EU, AA, CHN, TWN, KOR) / 1/step] TRAY 1: 2 *ENG 0: A3 5-181-002 1: 11x17 Sets tray 1 detection size (A3 or DLT) when “Auto Detect” is seletected in the [Tray Paper Settings]. 5-95 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 671 [0 or 1 / 1 (NA), 0 (EU, AA, CHN, TWN, KOR) / 1/step] TRAY 2: 3 *ENG 0: B4 5-181-007 1: 8 1/2x14 SEF Sets tray 2 detection size (B4 or GL SEF) when “Auto Detect” is seletected in the [Tray Paper Settings]. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-96...
  • Page 672 [0 or 1 / 1 (NA), 0 (EU, AA, CHN, TWN, KOR) / 1/step] TRAY 3: 4 *ENG 0: B5 LEF 5-181-012 1: Exe LEF Sets tray 3 detection size (B5 LEF or Exe LEF) when “Auto Detect” is seletected in the [Tray Paper Settings]. 5-97 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 673 [0 to 1 / 1 (NA), 0 (EU, AA, CHN, TWN, KOR) / 1/step] TRAY 4: 4 *ENG 0: B5 LEF 5-181-017 1: Exe LEF Sets tray 4 detection size (B5 LEF or Exe LEF) when “Auto Detect” is seletected in the [Tray Paper Settings]. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-98...
  • Page 674 [0 to 1 / 1 (NA), 0 (EU, AA, CHN, TWN, KOR) / 1/step] TRAY 5: 4 *ENG 0: B5 LEF 5-181-022 1: Exe LEF Sets tray 5 detection size (B5 LEF or Exe LEF) when “Auto Detect” is seletected in the [Tray Paper Settings]. 5-99 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 675 Displays the version number of the NVRAM on the controller board. 5-188-001 - *CTL [- / - / -] [Mode Set] 5191 Shifts to the power save mode or not. [0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step] 5-191-001 Power Str Set *CTL 0: OFF 1: ON D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-100...
  • Page 676 This program adjusts the position of the second side page numbers in the duplex mode with two in one. 5212  "- value" moves the page number positions to the right edge or leading edge.  "+ value" moves the page number positions to the left edge or trailing edge. 5-101 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 677 [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 0:OFF 1:ON 5-227-202 Zero Surplus Setting *CTL Specifies zero suppression of "Job serial numbers page print out starts number" that specified by optional text print out. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-102...
  • Page 678 [Auto Off Set] 5305 Turns on or off the limitation for the auto power off function. [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step] 5-305-101 Auto Off Limit Set *CTL 0: Limitation off 1: Limitation on 5-103 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 679 7th digit: The length of the advanced time. [0 to 9 / 1 hour /step] 8th digit: The length of the advanced time. [0 to 5 / 10 minutes /step]  The digits are counted from the left.  Make sure that SP5-307-1 is set to "1". D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-104...
  • Page 680 (for Windows, LDAP, RDH), the default document ACL is updated according to this SP setting. [0 to 255 / 0 / 1sec/step] 5-401-104 Authentication Time *CTL Specifies the timeout of the authentication. 5-105 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 681 Kit". This data can be converted from Method SAS (VAS) when installed or uninstalled. [0 to 0xFFFFFFFF / 0 / 1/step] "SDK" is the "Software Development 5-401-210 SDK2 UniqueID *CTL Kit". This data can be converted from SAS (VAS) when installed or uninstalled. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-106...
  • Page 682 [- / 00000000 / 1 /-] Device  Bit0: SDK authentication 0: Disable, 1: Enable  Bit1: SKB Display 0: Disable, 1: Enable  Bit2: Administrator login 0: Disable, 1: Enable  Bit3 to Bit7: Reserved (set “0” only) 5-107 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 683 Bit4: Using extended external billing device setup 0: OFF, 1: ON  Bit5, Bit6: Not used  Bit7: Using extended function J limit users 0: OFF, 1: ON 5-402-141 SDKJ1 ProductID - *CTL [0 to 0xFFFFFFFF / 0 / 1/step] SDKJ30 ProductID 5-402-170 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-108...
  • Page 684 [0 or 1 / 00000000 / 1/step] 5-411-006 Detail Option *CTL 0: Anonymous authentication OFF 1: Anonymous authentication ON 5412 [Krb-Certification] [- / 11111111 / 1/step] 0x01:AES256-CTS-HMAC-SHA1-96 0x02:AES128-CTS-HMAC-SHA1-96 0x04:DES3-CBC-SHA1 0x08:RC4-HMAC 5-412-100 Encrypt Mode *CTL 0x10:DES-CBC-MD5 0xFF(0x1F):ALL Executes kerberos certification according to certified encryption strength. 5-109 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 685 Switches on/off masking of continuously used IDs and passwords that are identical. [0 to 60 / 15 / 1minute/step] Sets the length of time for excluding 5-414-002 Mitigation Time *CTL continuous access for identical user IDs and passwords. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-110...
  • Page 686 Limits the number of passwords used 5-416-002 *CTL by the access exclusion and password attack detection functions. [1 to 10 / 3 / 1second/step] Sets the processing time interval for 5-416-003 Monitor Interval *CTL referencing user ID and password information. 5-111 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 687 [50 to 200 / 200 / 1/step] Sets a limit on the number of requests received for certification in 5-417-004 Attack Max Num *CTL order to slow down the certification speed when an excessive number of access attempts have been detected. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-112...
  • Page 688 5-420-051 SDK1 *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 5-420-061 SDK2 *CTL 0: Authentication ON 1: Authentication OFF 5-420-071 SDK3 *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 5-420-081 Browser *CTL 0: Authentication ON 1: Authentication OFF 5-113 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 689 [0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step] 5-431-030 *CTL 0: Not permit, 1: Permit [0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step] 5-431-031 FAXSub *CTL 0: Not permit, 1: Permit [0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step] 5-431-032 Folder *CTL 0: Not permit, 1: Permit D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-114...
  • Page 690 These SP codes determine how the authentication failures are displayed. [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 5-481-001 System Log Disp *CTL 0: Display OFF 1: Display ON [0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step] 5-481-002 Panel Disp *CTL 0: Display OFF 1: Display ON 5-115 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 691 Sets PM count level that emits PM alarm call. [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1/step] 0: Alarm off 5-501-001 PM Alarm Level *CTL 1 to 9999: Alarm goes off when Value (1 to 9999) x 1000 > PM counter D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-116...
  • Page 692 "1" when an SC is not detected during a set number of copied sheets. [0 to 255 / Default / hundred/step] 0: Alarm Off [Default] D197: 20 5-505-001 Error Alarm *CTL D198: 25 D199: 35...
  • Page 693 [250 to 10000 / 1000 / 1/step] 5-507-133 Interval :A4 *CTL Sets report level of paper supply administration call. [250 to 10000 / 1000 / 1/step] 5-507-134 Interval :A5 *CTL Sets report level of paper supply administration call. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-118...
  • Page 694 Jam Remains *CTL 0: Disable 1: Enable [0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step] 5-508-002 Continuous Jams *CTL 0: Disable 1: Enable [0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step] 5-508-003 Continuous Door Open *CTL 0: Disable 1: Enable 5-119 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 695 PM report alarm for each CSS parts: Sets DF paper feed criteria On/Off (report or not). [0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step] 5-514-001 Nomal *CTL 0: OFF 1: ON [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 5-514-002 *CTL 0: OFF 1: ON D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-120...
  • Page 696 *CTL 0: OFF Notice 1: ON [0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step] 5-515-008 Alarm Notice *CTL 0: OFF 1: ON [0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step] Supply Automatic 5-515-010 *CTL 0: OFF Ordering Call 1: ON 5-121 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 697 [1 to 65535 / 49104 / 1/step] 5-728-008 NAT UI Port4 *CTL [1 to 65535 / 55104 / 1/step] 5-728-009 NAT Machine Port5 *CTL [1 to 65535 / 49105 / 1/step] 5-728-010 NAT UI Port5 *CTL [1 to 65535 / 55105 / 1/step] D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-122...
  • Page 698 Sets the remaining days until the SDK application expires. [Counter Effect] 5731 This SP is uesd only for Japan machines. [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] Change MK1 Cnt 5-731-001 *CTL 0: OFF (Paper -> Combine) 1: ON 5-123 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 699 [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1/step] Low Power 5-745-218 *CTL [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1/step] Consumption 5-745-219 Silent Condition *CTL [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1/step] 5-745-220 Heater Off *CTL [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1/step] D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-124...

  • Page 700: Sp Mode Tables - Sp5000-2

    5-747-206 Browser3 [0 to 255 / 0 / 1/step] 5-747-207 Browser4 [0 to 255 / 0 / 1/step] 5-747-208 Browser5 [0 to 255 / 0 / 1/step] 5-747-209 Browser6 [0 to 255 / 0 / 1/step] 5-125 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 701 0: Common boot 1: Secure boot Bit3 to Bit7: Not used [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 0: Not connected Cheetah Panel 5-748-201 1: Connected Connect Setting Select “1” when the optional smart operation panel is to be installed. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-126...
  • Page 702 Bit1: Access permission from FlairAPI external device 5-752-001 0x00 - 0xff *CTL 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled Bit2: Switching dedicated IPv6 0: IPv6 only, 1: IPv4 priority Bit3:Remote UI function 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled Bit4 to Bit7: Not used 5-127 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 703 [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 5-758-001 Authentication *CTL 0: Disable 1: Enable [Memory Clear] 5801 Resets NVRAM data to the default settings. Before executing any of these SP codes, print an SMC Report. [- / - / -] 5-801-001 All Clear [Execute] D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-128...
  • Page 704 Initializes the automatic delete time setting for stored documents. (MCS: Memory Control Service) [- / - / -] 5-801-006 Copier application [Execute] Initializes all copier application settings. [- / - / -] 5-801-007 Fax Application [Execute] Initializes all fax application settings. 5-129 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 705 [- / - / -] [Execute] Deletes the Netfile (NFA) management 5-801-010 Web Service files and thumbnails, and initializes the Job login ID. Netfiles are jobs to be printed from the document server using a PC and the DeskTopBinder software. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-130...
  • Page 706 Initializes the MIRS (Machine Information Report Service) settings. [- / - / -] [Execute] 5-801-017 Initializes the CCS (Certification and Charge-control Service) settings. [- / - / -] [Execute] 5-801-018 SRM Memory Clr Initializes the SRM (System Resource Manager) settings. 5-131 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 707 [- / - / -] 5-801-025 Websys [Execute] [- / - / -] 5-801-026 [Execute] [- / - / -] 5-801-027 [Execute] [INPUT Check] 5803 See page 5-355 "Input Check Table". [OUTPUT Check] 5804 See page 5-387 "Output Check Table". D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-132...
  • Page 708 [0 to 255 / 0 / 1/step] 5-811-002 Displays serial number. 5811 [MachineSerial Set] [0 to 255 / 0 / 1/step] 5-811-004 Displays/Enters serial number of BCU EEPROM same as SP5-811-001. Sets this SP when replacing the BCU with a new BCU. 5-133 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 709 Enter the number and press #. [up to 20 / - / 1/step] Use this to input the telephone number 5-812-004 Operation *CTL of your sales agency. Enter the number and press #. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-134...
  • Page 710 5-816-007 SSL Disable *CTL Uses or does not use the RCG certification by SSL when calling the RCG. [1 to 90 / 30 / 1second/step] RCG Connect 5-816-008 *CTL Specifies the connect timeout interval Timeout when calling the RCG. 5-135 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 711 "0". 5-816-014 RCG Error Cause If "1" is displayed, this means that the authentication from client to server failed when the network re-booted. To restore normal operation, cycle the machine off/on to return a "0" (normal condition). D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-136...
  • Page 712 Proximity of the expiration of the certification. [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 0: Not use 1: Use 5-816-062 Use Proxy *CTL This SP setting determines if the proxy server is used when the machine communicates with the service center. 5-137 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 713 Embedded RCG-N and the gateway. This setting is necessary to set 5-816-064 Proxy PortNumber *CTL up the embedded RC Gate-N.  This port number is customer information and is not printed in the SMC report. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-138...
  • Page 714 The certification update failed, and the GW URL is being notified of the failed update. The period of the certification has expired and new request for an update is being sent to the GW URL. 5-139 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 715 Request for certification update in progress. The current certification 5-816-068 has expired. An SSL error notification has been issued. Issued after the certification has expired. Notification of shift from a common authentication to an individual certification. Notification of a common certification without ID2. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-140...
  • Page 716 Allows the service technician to confirm the 5-816-086 Firmware Size *CTL size of the firmware data files during the firmware update execution. [- / - / -] 5-816-087 CERT: Macro Ver. Displays the macro version of the @Remote certification. Max. 8digits. 5-141 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 717 30 bytes. Asterisks () indicate that no @Remote certification exists. Max. 7 digits. [- / - / -] Displays the start time of the period for which 5-816-093 CERT: Valid Start the current @Remote certification is enabled. Max. 10 digits. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-142...
  • Page 718 *CTL communication. If NRS device runs, the Limit setting specified here will be invalid. Enable: Uses as the destinations Disable: Does not use as the destinations IPv6 IPv4 Value Hostname Address Address Disable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable 5-143 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 719 5-816-150 Selection Country 5: France 6: Italy 7: Netherlands 8: Belgium 9: Luxembourg 10: Spain Line Type [- / - / -] 5-816-151 Automatic [Execute] Judgement Line Type 5-816-152 [0 to 255 / 0 / 0] Judgement Result D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-144...
  • Page 720 Displays the modem serial number. Retransmission [- / - / -] 5-816-174 Limit [Execute] [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 5-816-187 FAX TX Priority 0: OFF 1: ON [- / - / -] 5-816-200 Manual Polling [Execute] Executes the manual polling. 5-145 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 721 [- / - / -] Displays the result of the notification sent to the device from 5-816-205 Confirm Place the GW URL in answer to the inquiry request. Displayed only when the result is registered at the GW URL. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-146...
  • Page 722 25: Modem circuit failing out 26: Circuit is in use [-2147483647 to 2147483647 / 0 / 1/step] Displays a number that describes 5-816-208 Error Code the error code that was issued when either SP5816-204 or SP5816-207 was executed. 5-147 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 723 -12007 registration was different from the one used at confirmation. Operation Error, Incorrect Setting Update certification failed because -12008 mainframe was in use. D2 mismatch between an individual -12009 certification and NVRAM. -12010 Certification area is not initialized. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-148...
  • Page 724 5-816-245 CommErrorSate 2 [- / - / -] 5-816-246 CommErrorSate 3 [- / - / -] 5-816-247 SSL Err Count [0 to 255 / 0 / 1] 5-816-248 Other Err Count [0 to 255 / 0 / 1] 5-149 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 725 [0 to 15 / “/RCG/services/” /-] Sets the IPv6 address of the RCG 5-821-006 RCG IPv6 URL Path *CTL destination URL path for call processing at the remote service center. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-150...
  • Page 726 Downloads data from an SD card to the NVRAM in the machine. After 5825 downloading is completed, remove the SD card and turn the machine power off and on. [- / - / -] 5-825-001 NV-RAM Download [Execute] 5-151 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 727 [- / 0111111 / - ] Validates or invalidates the job spooling function for each protocol. 0: Validates 1: Invalidates bit0: LPR 5-828-069 Job Spooling (Protocol) *CTL bit1: FTP bit2: IPP bit3: SMB bit4: BMLinkS bit5: DIPRINT bit6: sftp bit7: (Reserved) D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-152...
  • Page 728 5-828-149 Address 2 format: "Status Address" + "Prefix Length" Active IPv6 Stateless 5-828-151 The IPv6 address consists of a total Address 3 128 bits configured in 8 blocks of 16 Active IPv6 Stateless bits each. 5-828-153 Address 4 5-153 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 729 0: Disable, 1: Enable [0x0000 to 0xffff / FFFFh / - ] Displays or does not display the Web system items. 0: Not displayed, 5-828-236 Web Item visible *CTL 1:Displayed bit0: Net RICOH bit1: Consumable Supplier bit2-15: Reserved (all) D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-154...
  • Page 730 [0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step] Displays or does not display the link to Web shopping link 5-828-237 *CTL Net RICOH on the top page and link visible page of the web system. 0: Not display, 1:Display [0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step]...

  • Page 731: Bit Assignment For Sp5-828-087

    Scan to NCP Appletalk Reserve DHCP Bluetooth DHCPv6 IEEE 1284 telnet USB printing Dynamic DNS HTTPS Netware printing BMLinkS printing LLTD diprint printing IPP printing LPRprinting IPP printing (SSL) ftp printing rsh printing Sftp D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-156...
  • Page 732 [- / - / -] 5-832-009 a Design) [Execute] [- / - / -] 5-832-010 HDD Formatting (Log) [Execute] HDD Formatting (Ridoc [- / - / -] 5-832-011 I/F) [Execute] HDD Formatting [- / - / -] 5-832-012 (Thumbnail) [Execute] 5-157 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 733 Reduction for Copy B&W 1: 1/2 5-836-073 *CTL Other 2: 1/3 3: 1/4 6: 2/3 [0 to 6 / 0 / 1/step] 0: 1, Reduction for Printer 1: 1/2 5-836-075 *CTL B&W 2: 1/3 3: 1/4 6: 2/3 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-158...
  • Page 734 (CS). 5-836-102 Primary srv scheme *CTL [Char: Max. 6 / - / -] [1 to 65535 / 80 / 1/step] 5-836-103 Primary srv port number *CTL Use to set the IO device for the primary CS remotely. 5-159 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 735 200dpi, 4: 150dpi, 5: 100dpi, 6: 75dpi [0 to 255 / 3 / 1/step] Sets the IO device of the CS remotely: 5-836-124 Reso: Print(Mono) *CTL 0: 600dpi, 1: 400dpi, 2: 300dpi, 3: 200dpi, 4: 150dpi, 5: 100dpi, 6: 75dpi D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-160...
  • Page 736 1: ON, 0: OFF [10 to 10000 / 2000 / 1/step] Stand-by Doc Max Expands the scope of used resources 5-836-142 *CTL Number and performance. Switch this off if this feature is not being used. 5-161 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 737 Europe: 1 to 13 NA/ Asia: 1 to 11 [00 to 11 / 00000000 / 1 binary/step] Selects the WEP key. 00: Key #1 5-840-011 WEP Key Select *CTL 01: Key #2 (Reserved) 10: Key #3 (Reserved) 11: Key #4 (Reserved) D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-162...
  • Page 738 2: warning 3: error [0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step] 0: Not used 5-840-046 11w *CTL 1: preferentially used 2: Required [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 5-840-047 PSK Set Type *CTL 0: Passphrase 1: PSK 5-163 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 739: Sp Mode Tables - Sp5000-3

    *CTL [- / - / -] 5-841-014 StapleStd4 *CTL [- / - / -] 5-841-021 StapleBind1 *CTL [- / - / -] 5-841-022 StapleBind2 *CTL [- / - / -] 5-841-023 StapleBind3 *CTL [- / - / -] D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-164...
  • Page 740 *CTL transmission. [0x01:Full Speed] [0x04Auto Change] Sets the vendor ID: 5-844-002 Vendor ID *CTL Initial Setting: 0x05A Ricoh Company [0x0000 to 0xFFFF/1] DFU Sets the product ID. 5-844-003 Product ID *CTL [0x0000 to 0xFFFF/1] DFU [0 to 9999 / 100 / 1/step] Sets the device release number of the BCD (binary coded decimal) display.
  • Page 741 [0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step] 5-844-008 Mac Supply Level *CTL 0: OFF 1: ON [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step] Displays or does not display USB 5-844-100 Notify Unsupport *CTL unsupported message. 0: Not display 1: Display D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-166...
  • Page 742 [0 to 4 / 0 / 1/step] 0: Unknown 1: SG1 Accessory version 2: SG1 package version 5-845-009 Delivery Server Model *CTL 3: SG2 Accessory version 4: SG2 package version Allows changing the model of the delivery server registered by the I/O device. 5-167 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 743 Server Scheme (Primary) This is used for the scan router 5-845-013 *CTL program. 6 Character strings. [1 to 65535 / 80 / 1/step] Server Port Number 5-845-014 *CTL This is used for the scan router (Primary) DFU program. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-168...
  • Page 744 5-845-022 Rapid Sending Control *CTL continue to sending data over a network. If you switch off this SP, machine stops communication to network when it found wrong setting in its self.  This setting would reduce network traffic by wrong setting. 5-169 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 745 Sets the interval for retry attempts when the delivery server fails to acquire the delivery server address Delivery Server Retry 5-846-006 *CTL book. Timer 0: retry OFF Retry time x retry count has to be set in 180second (SC reboot compatible model). D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-170...
  • Page 746 [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 0: Uses certification information of device login user. 5-846-021 Folder Auth Change *CTL 1: Uses certification information of address. This SP would be reflected after rebooting the machine. 5-171 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 747 [0 to 30 / 0 / 1/step] Displays the slot number where an address book data is in. 0: Unconfirmed 5-846-043 Addr Book Media *CTL 1: SD Slot 1 2: SD Slot 2 4: USB Flash ROM 20: HDD 30: Nothing D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-172...
  • Page 748 [- / - / -] [Execute] 5-846-051 Backup All Addr Book Uploads all directory information to the SD card. [- / - / -] [Execute] 5-846-052 Restore All Addr Book Downloads all directory information from the SD card. 5-173 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 749 UCS local address book. [0: OFF,1: ON] Bit: Meaning 5-846-060 Search option *CTL 0: Checks both upper/lower case characters 1: Japan Only 2: Japan Only 3: Japan Only 4 to 7: Not Used D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-174...
  • Page 750 5-846-063 Complexity Option 2 DFU *CTL  This SP does not normally require adjustment.  This SP is enabled only after the system administrator has set up a group password policy to control access to the address book. 5-175 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 751 5-846-091 FTP Auth Port Setting *CTL distribution server address book that is used in the identification mode. [0 to 255 / - / 1/step] 5-846-094 Encryption Stat *CTL Shows the status of the encryption function for the address book data. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-176...
  • Page 752 *CTL 3: 1/4x 4: 1/6x 5: 1/8x 6: 2/3x [ 0 to 6 / 0 / 1/step] 0: 1x 1: 1/2x 2: 1/3x 5-847-003 Rate for Copy B&W Other *CTL 3: 1/4x 4: 1/6x 5: 1/8x 6: 2/3x 5-177 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 753 0000: access enabled 5-848-002 *CTL (only Lower 4bits) 0001: access disabled 0010: read only [0000 to 0010 / 00000000 / 4bit assign] Access Control: Doc. Svr. 0000: access enabled 5-848-003 *CTL Print (Lower 4bits) 0001: access disabled 0010: read only D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-178...
  • Page 754 0000: access enabled 5-848-022 uadministration *CTL 0001: access disabled (Lower 4bits) 0010: read only [0000 to 0010 / 00000000 / 4bit assign] Access Ctrl: Log Service 0000: access enabled 5-848-024 *CTL (Lower 4bits) 0001: access disabled 0010: read only 5-179 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 755 5-849-002 Switch to Print *CTL total counter. 0: OFF (No Print) 1: ON (Print) [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1/step] 5-849-003 Total Counter *CTL Displays total count value from establishment data (SP5-849-001). D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-180...
  • Page 756 You must always execute this SP after replacing the HDD or after formatting the HDD. Always switch the machine off and on after executing this SP.  This SP can be executed only with the hard disks installed. [- / - / -] 5-853-001 - [Execute] 5-181 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 757 [1 to 3 / 2/ 1/step] 1: IC card 2: HDD 3: SD card 5-857-002 Target(2:HDD 3:SD) *CTL Selects the storage device to save debug logs information when the conditions set with SP5-858 are satisfied. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-182...
  • Page 758 [Execute] 5-857-151 *CTL Dips Displays the total time to get the all debug logs. [- / - / -] Get Controller Debug [Execute] 5-857-152 *CTL Logs Time Dips Displays the total time to get the controller debug logs. 5-183 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 759 [0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step] Determines whether RFC2.5298 compliance is switched on for MDN reply mail. MDN Response 5-860-021 *CTL 0: No RFC2298 Compliance 1: Yes Sends MAIL FROM SMTP Commands as empty (<>) when conforming to RFC2298. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-184...
  • Page 760 0: Microsoft Outlook Express standard 1: Internet Draft standard 2: RFC standard [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 0: non-check, 1: check S/MIME: Authentication 5-860-028 *CTL Specifies whether to check or Check non-check address certification at sending S/MIME mail. 5-185 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 761 NOTE: Turn off and on the main power switch after the "Initialize (-003)" and "Writing (-001)" have been done. [- / - / -] [Execute] 5-870-004 Writing: 2048bit Writes the authentication data used for @Remote into the flash ROM. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-186...
  • Page 762 This SP copies back the application programs from an SD card in SD Card 5-873-002 UndoExec Slot 2 to the original SD card in SD card slot 1. Use this menu when you have mistakenly copied some programs by using "Move Exec" (SP5873-1). 5-187 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 763 The reboot is not executed for Type A or C SC codes. [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] This setting determines how machine reboots after an SC code is 5-875-002 Reboot Type *CTL issued. 0: Manual reboot 1: Automatic reboot. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-188...
  • Page 764 And be sure to turn Off the main power supply between step 2 (linking SD card) and step 4 (copying dictionary). * OCR dictionary is able to overwrite. Overwrite process is same as initial installation process. card execute Installation process 1 to 4. 5-189 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 765 Sets the default display format for document list in document box. [5 to 20 / 10 / 1/step] Sets the default display number of 5-885-051 DocSvr Trans *CTL items per page in the document list in document box. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-190...
  • Page 766 When selecting "0", only new firmware 5-886-100 Skip Version Chech against the firmware in the machine is updated at the package firmware updating. Do not change this setting to "1" normally. The setting "1" is only used for a special order. 5-191 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 767 [Personal Information Protect] 5888 Selects the protection level for logs. [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 0: No authentication, No protection for 5-888-001 - *CTL logs 1: No authentication, Protected logs (only an administrator can see the logs) D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-192...
  • Page 768 [- / - / -] [text display type] 5-893-010 SDK-10 [- / - / -] [text display type] 5-893-011 SDK-11 [- / - / -] [text display type] 5-893-012 SDK-12 [- / - / -] [text display type] 5-193 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 769 15byte). Selects and sets model name (less than16byte) by choosing from displayed on it. Set data on every Ricoh, OEM by CSS at the factory shipment already. And We set this SP that can select it 5-907-001 -...
  • Page 770 The act of deleting a ruled line so that you will be required 2character at double character entry, or fill its back end with the grey.  Consider the space that after character stings, enclose specified character strings by heavy ruled line. 5-195 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 771 [User Stamp Registration] 5973 [0 to 3 / 0 / 0.1mm/step] 5-973-101 Frame deletion setting *CTL Sets the margin for the user stamp registration for each edge of paper. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-196...
  • Page 772 [- / - / -] 5-990-002 SP (Mode Data List) [Execute] [- / - / -] 5-990-003 User Program [Execute] [- / - / -] 5-990-004 Logging Data [Execute] [- / - / -] 5-990-005 Diagnostic Report [Execute] 5-197 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 773 2: back SD slot (service slot) [- / - / -] 5-992-001 All (Data List) [Execute] [- / - / -] 5-992-002 SP (Mode Data List) [Execute] [- / - / -] 5-992-003 User Program [Execute] This SP for only MFP model. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-198...
  • Page 774 5-992-023 Scanner User Program [Execute] This SP for only MFP model. [- / - / -] 5-992-024 SDK/J Summary [Execute] [- / - / -] 5-992-025 SDK/J Application Info [Execute] [- / - / -] 5-992-026 Printer SP mode [Execute] 5-199 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 775: Sp Mode Tables - Sp6000-1

    If the leading edge margin of image is wide, increase value. If the leading edge of image is missing, decrease value.  Value increase: an image is moved to the leading edge of paper.  Value decrease: an image is moved to the trailing edge of paper. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-200...
  • Page 776 If the trailing edge of the rear original has the shadow, use this SP to erase 6-006-008  Value increase: Dereases scanning range of the trailing edge of original.  Value decrease: Increases scanning range of the trailing edge of original. 5-201 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 777 For SPDF models only. Adjusts the erase margin of the front side at the original trailing edge for SPDF. 6-006-014  Value increase: Dereases scanning range of the trailing edge of original.  Value decrease: Increases scanning range of the trailing edge of original. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-202...
  • Page 778 Value decrease: Moves stamp position towards original leading edge. 6-010-001 - *ENG [-5.0 to 5.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step] [1-Pass ADF INPUT Check] 6011 See page 5-355 "Input Check Table". [1-Pass ADF OUTPUT Check] 6012 See page 5-387 "Output Check Table". 5-203 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 779 [-5.0 to 5.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 %/step] [Skew Correction Moving Setting] 6020 Selects the paper size for the original skew correction. [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 6-020-001 - *ENG 0: Small sizes (B6, A5, HLT) 1: All sizes D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-204...
  • Page 780 Adjusting value to -: Punch position moves toward front side of 6101 machine.  Adjusting value to +: Punch position moves toward rear side of machine. 6-101-001 JPN/EU: 2-Hole 6-101-002 NA: 3-Hole 6-101-003 Europe: 4-Hole [-2.0 to 2.0 / 0.0 / 0.4mm/step] 6-101-004 NEU: 4-Hole 6-101-005 NA: 2-Hole 5-205 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 781 Other [-5.0 to 5.0 / 0.0 / 0.2mm/step] Adjusts the skew correction amount in the punch mode for non specified 6-102-017 paper.  Adjusts value to -: Buckling amount decreases  Adjusts value to +: Buckling amount increases. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-206...
  • Page 782 1: BuckleAdj Off 6-103-015 16K SEF 6-103-016 16K LEF [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] Other 0: BuckleAdj On 1: BuckleAdj Off 6-103-017 Enables or disables the skew correction in the punch mode for non specified paper. 5-207 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 783 [-1.5 to 1.5 / 0.0 / 0.5mm/step] 6-104-009 LT SEF 6-104-010 LT LEF 6-104-011 HLT LEF 6-104-012 8K SEF [-1.5 to 1.5 / 0.0 / 0.5mm/step] 6-104-013 16K LEF 6-104-014 Other [-1.5 to 1.5 / 0.0 / 0.5mm/step] D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-208...
  • Page 784 [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 6-106-007 DLT SEF 0: Jogging On 1: Jogging Off 6-106-008 LG SEF 6-106-009 LT SEF 6-106-010 LT LEF [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 6-106-011 HLT LEF 0: Jogging On 1: Jogging Off 6-106-012 8K SEF 5-209 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 785 [-1.5 to 1.5 / 0.0 / 0.5mm/step] 6-107-009 LT SEF 6-107-010 LT LEF 6-107-011 8K SEF 6-107-012 16K SEF [-1.5 to 1.5 / 0.0 / 0.5mm/step] 6-107-013 16K LEF 6-107-014 Other [-1.5 to 1.5 / 0.0 / 0.5mm/step] D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-210...
  • Page 786 6-108-001 A3 SEF 6-108-002 B4 SEF 6-108-003 A4 SEF 6-108-004 B5 SEF 6-108-005 DLT SEF [-1.5 to 1.5 / 0.0 / 0.5mm/step] 6-108-006 LG SEF 6-108-007 LT SEF 6-108-008 12x18 6-108-009 8K SEF 6-108-010 Other 5-211 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 787 Adjusts the jogging times of the jogger fences on the booklet stapling unit for each paper size. 6-110-001 A3 SEF 6-110-002 B4 SEF [0 to 2 / 0 / 1time/step] 6-110-003 A4 SEF 6-110-004 B5 SEF 6-110-005 DLT SEF [0 to 2 / 0 / 1time/step] D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-212...
  • Page 788 [-3.5 to 3.5 / 0.0 / 0.5mm/step] 6-111-009 LT SEF 6-111-010 LT LEF 6-111-011 8K SEF 6-111-012 16K SEF [-3.5 to 3.5 / 0.0 / 0.5mm/step] 6-111-013 16K LEF 6-111-014 Other [-3.5 to 3.5 / 0.0 / 0.5mm/step] 5-213 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 789 6-113-001 A3 SEF [-3.0 to 3.0 / 0.0 / 0.2mm/step] 6-113-002 B4 SEF [-3.0 to 3.0 / 0.0 / 0.2mm/step] 6-113-003 A4 SEF [-3.0 to 3.0 / 0.0 / 0.2mm/step] 6-113-004 B5 SEF [-3.0 to 3.0 / 0.0 / 0.2mm/step] D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-214...
  • Page 790 6-114-007 LT SEF [0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step] 6-114-008 12x18 [0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step] 6-114-009 8K SEF [0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step] 6-114-010 Other [0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step] 5-215 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 791 [-1 to 0 / 0 / 1sheet/step] 6-116-009 LT SEF 6-116-010 LT LEF 6-116-011 8K SEF 6-116-012 16K SEF [-1 to 0 / 0 / 1sheet/step] 6-116-013 16K LEF 6-116-014 Other [-1 to 0 / 0 / 1sheet/step] D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-216...
  • Page 792 [-7 to 0 / 0 / 1sheet/step] 6-117-003 A4 SEF 6-117-004 B5 SEF 6-117-005 DLT SEF 6-117-006 LG SEF 6-117-007 LT SEF [-7 to 0 / 0 / 1sheet/step] 6-117-008 12x18 6-117-009 8K SEF 6-117-010 Other [-7 to 0 / 0 / 1sheet/step] 5-217 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 793 [-16 to 16 / 0 / 2mm/step] 6-118-009 LT SEF 6-118-010 LT LEF 6-118-011 8K SEF 6-118-012 16K SEF [-16 to 16 / 0 / 2mm/step] 6-118-013 16K LEF 6-118-014 Other [-16 to 16 / 0 / 2mm/step] D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-218...

  • Page 794: Sp Mode Tables - Sp6000-2

    Adjusts pre-stack offset amount (sub scan direction shearing amount of 6-119-010 1st and 2nd, 2nd and 3rd sheet) when saddle stitching except the specified paper. Default is No offset, when adjusting value to +, offset amount enlarges, when adjusting value to -, reduces. 5-219 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 795 6-120-010 LT LEF 6-120-011 8K SEF 6-120-012 16K SEF [0 to 30 / 0 / 10mm/step] 6-120-013 16K LEF Other 6-120-014 Adjusts over sending amount (sub scan direction) of positioning roller when edge stitching except the specified paper. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-220...
  • Page 796  Adjusts value to +: towards up  Adjusts value to -: towards down [INPUT Check: 2K/3K FIN] 6123 See page 5-355 "Input Check Table". [OUTPUT Check: 2K/3K FIN] 6124 See page 5-387 "Output Check Table". 5-221 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 797 Adjusting value to +: hole position moves toward rear side of machine. Domestic 6-131-001 *ENG 2Hole(Europe 2Hole) 6-131-002 North America 3Hole *ENG [-2.0 to 2.0 / 0.0 / 0.4mm/step] 6-131-003 Europe 4Hole *ENG 6-131-004 North Europe 4Hole *ENG 6-131-005 North America 2Hole *ENG D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-222...
  • Page 798 [-3.0 to 3.0 / 0.0 / 0.5mm/step] 6-132-011 8K-T [-3.0 to 3.0 / 0.0 / 0.5mm/step] 6-132-012 16K-T [-3.0 to 3.0 / 0.0 / 0.5mm/step] 6-132-013 16K-Y [-3.0 to 3.0 / 0.0 / 0.5mm/step] 6-132-014 Other [-3.0 to 3.0 / 0.0 / 0.5mm/step] 5-223 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 799 Adjusts saddle stitch staple position (sub scan direction) of specified paper. 6141  Adjusting value to -: staple position moves toward trailing edge of paper when intaking.  Adjusting value to +: folding position moves toward leading edge of paper when intaking. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-224...
  • Page 800  Adjusting value to +: hole position moves toward leading edge of paper when intaking. 6-142-001 JPN/EU: 2-Hole 6-142-002 NA: 3-Hole 6-142-003 Europe: 4-Hole [-7.5 to 7.5 / 0.0 / 0.5mm/step] 6-142-004 NEU: 4-Hole 6-142-005 NA: 2-Hole 5-225 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 801 Adjusts width (main scan direction) of jogger when running conformity to except the specified paper. 6-143-015  Adjusts value to -: move towards jogger width is tighter than base value.  Adjusts value to +: move towards jogger width is wider than base value. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-226...
  • Page 802 6-145-004 A4 LEF 6-145-005 B5 SEF 6-145-006 B5 LEF 6-145-007 A5 LEF 6-145-008 DLT SEF [-5.0 to 5.0 / 0.0 / 0.2mm/step] 6-145-009 LG SEF 6-145-010 LT SEF 6-145-011 LT LEF [-5.0 to 5.0 / 0.0 / 0.2mm/step] 5-227 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 803 [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 6-146-003 A4 SEF 0: enable 1: disable [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 6-146-004 A4 LEF 0: enable 1: disable [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 6-146-005 B5 SEF 0: enable 1: disable D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-228...
  • Page 804 [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 6-146-013 12x18 0: enable 1: disable [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 6-146-014 8K SEF 0: enable 1: disable [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 6-146-015 16K SEF 0: enable 1: disable 5-229 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 805 6-147-005 DLT SEF [-3.0 to 3.0 / 0.0 / 0.2mm/step] 6-147-006 LG SEF [-3.0 to 3.0 / 0.0 / 0.2mm/step] 6-147-007 LT SEF [-3.0 to 3.0 / 0.0 / 0.2mm/step] 6-147-008 12x18 [-3.0 to 3.0 / 0.0 / 0.2mm/step] D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-230...
  • Page 806 6-150-003 A4 SEF 6-150-004 A4 LEF 6-150-005 B5 SEF 6-150-006 B5 LEF 6-150-007 DLT SEF [-100 to 100 / 0 / 10msec/step] 6-150-008 LG SEF 6-150-009 LT SEF 6-150-010 LT LEF 6-150-011 12x18 6-150-012 8K SEF 6-150-013 16K SEF 5-231 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 807 6-152-005 B5 SEF [-100 to 100 / 0 / 10msec/step] 6-152-006 B5 LEF [-100 to 100 / 0 / 10msec/step] 6-152-007 DLT SEF [-100 to 100 / 0 / 10msec/step] 6-152-008 LG SEF [-100 to 100 / 0 / 10msec/step] D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-232...
  • Page 808 6-154-001 1 - 10 Sheets 6-154-002 11 - 20 Sheets 6-154-003 21 - 30 Sheets [-100 to 100 / 0 / 10msec/step] 6-154-004 31 - 40 Sheets 6-154-005 41 - 50 Sheets [FIN (1K FIN) INPUT Check] 6161 See page 5-355 5-233 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 809 6-182-001 PaperLength:297.0-457.2mm,Thick(106-300g/m2) ENG [1 to 5 / 2 / 1/step] 6-182-002 PaperLength:297.0-457.2mm,Plain(60-105g/m2) ENG [1 to 5 / 2 / 1/step] 6-182-003 PaperLength:297.0-457.2mm,Thin(52-59g/m2) ENG [1 to 5 / 4 / 1/step] 6-182-004 PaperLength:210.0-296.9mm,Thick(106-300g/m2) ENG [1 to 5 / 2 / 1/step] D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-234...
  • Page 810 1: 1 time binding (high productivity) 2: 2 times binding (low productivity) 6801 [1-pass Stamp Unit] [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] *ENG 0: No 1: Yes 6-801-001 For 1 path simultaneous duplex models only. Sets installed/not installed of DONE stamp unit. 5-235 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 811 Staples 0 to 50 (Initial: 0) *CTL [0 to 50 / 0 / 1/step] Saddles 0 to 50 (Initial: 6-830-002 *CTL [0 to 50 / 0 / 1/step] Half-Fold 0 to 50 (Initial: 6-830-003 *CTL [0 to 50 / 0 / 1/step] D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-236...

  • Page 812: Sp Mode Tables - Sp7000-1

    [00000 to 65535 / 0 / 1/step] 7-403-008 Latest 7 *CTL [00000 to 65535 / 0 / 1/step] 7-403-009 Latest 8 *CTL [00000 to 65535 / 0 / 1/step] 7-403-010 Latest 9 *CTL [00000 to 65535 / 0 / 1/step] 5-237 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 813 [00000 to 65535 / 0 / 1/step] [Total Original Jam Counter] 7503 Displays the total number of original jams. 7-503-001 *CTL [00000 to 65535 / 0 / 1/step] 7-503-002 Total Original Counter *CTL [00000 to 65535 / 0 / 1/step] D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-238...
  • Page 814 [0000 to 9999 / - / 1/step] 7-504-022 Bridge Relay: On *CTL [0000 to 9999 / - / 1/step] 7-504-024 Inverter: On *CTL [0000 to 9999 / - / 1/step] 7-504-025 Duplex Exit: On *CTL [0000 to 9999 / - / 1/step] 5-239 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 815 [0000 to 9999 / - / 1/step] 7-504-106 Rear Jogger Motor *CTL [0000 to 9999 / - / 1/step] 7-504-107 Shift Roller Motor *CTL [0000 to 9999 / - / 1/step] 7-504-108 Positioning Motor *CTL [0000 to 9999 / - / 1/step] D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-240...
  • Page 816 Sensor: On Switchback Transport 7-504-155 *CTL [0000 to 9999 / - / 1/step] Sensor: Off 7-504-156 Proof Tray Exit *CTL [0000 to 9999 / - / 1/step] 7-504-157 Shift Tray Exit *CTL [0000 to 9999 / - / 1/step] 5-241 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 817 Corner Stapler Move 7-504-173 *CTL [0000 to 9999 / - / 1/step] Motor 7-504-174 Corner Stapler Motor *CTL [0000 to 9999 / - / 1/step] Saddle Stitch Stapler 7-504-175 *CTL [0000 to 9999 / - / 1/step] Jogger Motor D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-242...
  • Page 818 [0000 to 9999 / - / 1/step] 7-504-200 Entrance: On *CTL [0000 to 9999 / - / 1/step] 7-504-201 Entrance: Off *CTL [0000 to 9999 / - / 1/step] 7-504-202 Proog Tray Exit: On *CTL [0000 to 9999 / - / 1/step] 5-243 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 819 [0000 to 9999 / - / 1/step] 7-504-228 Positioning Motor *CTL [0000 to 9999 / - / 1/step] 7-504-229 Stapler Shift Motor *CTL [0000 to 9999 / - / 1/step] 7-504-230 Stapler Motor *CTL [0000 to 9999 / - / 1/step] D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-244...
  • Page 820 [0000 to 9999 / 0 / 1/step] Sn:Off 7-505-066 Registration Sensor:Off *CTL [0000 to 9999 / 0 / 1/step] 7-505-067 Original Exit Sensor:Off *CTL [0000 to 9999 / 0 / 1/step] 7-505-239 Original Pull *CTL [0000 to 9999 / 0 / 1/step] 5-245 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 821 TOTAL:0000334 7507 DATE:Mon Mar 15 11:44:50 2000 where: CODE is the SP7504-* number (see above). SIZE is the ASAP paper size code in hex. TOTAL is the total jam error count DATE is the date the jams occurred. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-246...
  • Page 822 [- / - / -] 7-508-004 Latest 3 *CTL [- / - / -] 7-508-005 Latest 4 *CTL [- / - / -] 7-508-006 Latest 5 *CTL [- / - / -] 7-508-007 Latest 6 *CTL [- / - / -] 5-247 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 823 [0000 to 9999 / 0 / 1/step] 7-509-049 Shift Motor *CTL [0000 to 9999 / 0 / 1/step] 7-509-050 Junction Motor *CTL [0000 to 9999 / 0 / 1/step] Exit Pressure Release 7-509-051 *CTL [0000 to 9999 / 0 / 1/step] Motor D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-248...
  • Page 824 [0000 to 9999 / - / 1/step] 7-514-015 LCT Transport: On *CTL [0000 to 9999 / - / 1/step] 7-514-017 Registration: On *CTL [0000 to 9999 / - / 1/step] 7-514-018 Fusing Entrance: On *CTL [0000 to 9999 / - / 1/step] 5-249 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 825 [0000 to 9999 / - / 1/step] 7-514-100 Entrance: On *CTL [0000 to 9999 / - / 1/step] 7-514-101 Entrance: Off *CTL [0000 to 9999 / - / 1/step] 7-514-102 Transport : On *CTL [0000 to 9999 / - / 1/step] D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-250...
  • Page 826 [0000 to 9999 / - / 1/step] 7-514-151 Entrance Sensor: Off *CTL [0000 to 9999 / - / 1/step] Horizontal Transport 7-514-152 *CTL [0000 to 9999 / - / 1/step] Sensor: On HorizontalTransportSenor: 7-514-153 *CTL [0000 to 9999 / - / 1/step] 5-251 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 827 [0000 to 9999 / - / 1/step] Motor 7-514-170 Jogger Motor *CTL [0000 to 9999 / - / 1/step] 7-514-171 Positioning Motor *CTL [0000 to 9999 / - / 1/step] 7-514-172 Feed Out Motor *CTL [0000 to 9999 / - / 1/step] D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-252...
  • Page 828 Shift Tray Jogger Rear 7-514-186 *CTL [0000 to 9999 / - / 1/step] Motor Shift Tray Jogger 7-514-187 *CTL [0000 to 9999 / - / 1/step] Retraction Motor 7-514-188 Stack Roller Motor *CTL [0000 to 9999 / - / 1/step] 5-253 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 829 [0000 to 9999 / - / 1/step] Roller Motor 7-514-223 Shift Motor *CTL [0000 to 9999 / - / 1/step] 7-514-224 Jogger Motor *CTL [0000 to 9999 / - / 1/step] 7-514-225 Exit Guide Plate Motor *CTL [0000 to 9999 / - / 1/step] D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-254...
  • Page 830 [0000 to 9999 / - / 1/step] 7-514-234 Folder Blade Motor *CTL [0000 to 9999 / - / 1/step] 7-514-248 No Exit Response *CTL [0000 to 9999 / - / 1/step] Main Machine Setting 7-514-249 *CTL [0000 to 9999 / - / 1/step] Incorrect 5-255 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 831 [0000 to 9999 / 0 / 1/step] Sn:Off 7-515-066 Registration Sensor:Off *CTL [0000 to 9999 / 0 / 1/step] 7-515-067 Original Exit Sensor:Off *CTL [0000 to 9999 / 0 / 1/step] 7-515-239 Original Pull *CTL [0000 to 9999 / 0 / 1/step] D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-256...

  • Page 832: Sp Mode Tables - Sp7000-2

    [0000 to 9999 / 0 / 1/step] 7-516-166 LT SEF *CTL [0000 to 9999 / 0 / 1/step] 7-516-172 HLT SEF *CTL [0000 to 9999 / 0 / 1/step] 7-516-255 Others *CTL [0000 to 9999 / 0 / 1/step] 5-257 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 833 [0000 to 9999 / 0 / 1/step] 7-519-053 Feed-Out: Off *CTL [0000 to 9999 / 0 / 1/step] 7-519-093 No Exit Response *CTL [0000 to 9999 / 0 / 1/step] Main Machine Setting 7-519-094 *CTL [0000 to 9999 / 0 / 1/step] Incorrect D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-258...
  • Page 834 [1 to 255 / 0 / 1/step] 7-520-010 ErrorRecord10 *CTL [1 to 255 / 0 / 1/step] [PM Parts Counter Display] 7617 7-617-001 Normal *CTL [0000 to 9999999 / 0 / 1/step ] 7-617-002 *CTL [0000 to 9999999 / 0 / 1/step] 5-259 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 835 7-621-022 Stripper [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1page/step] 7-621-023 #Dev Unit [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1page/step] 7-621-024 Developer [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1page/step] 7-621-025 Development Filter [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1page/step] D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-260...
  • Page 836 Roller 7-622-021 OPC [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 7-622-022 Stripper [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 7-622-023 #Dev Unit [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 7-622-024 Developer [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 5-261 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 837 [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] [Part Replacement Operation ON/OFF] 7624 7-624-002 #PCU 7-624-009 Cleaning Blade 7-624-018 Charge Roller Cleaner:Charge 7-624-019 Roller [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 7-624-021 OPC 7-624-022 Stripper 7-624-023 #Dev Unit 7-624-024 Developer D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-262...
  • Page 838 Displays the page counter for the previous development mixing auger bearings. 7626 [Previous Unit Counter2: Pages] Bearing:Development [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1page] Screw 7-626-028 Displays the page counter for the 2nd previous development mixing auger bearings. 5-263 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 839 Press [EXECUTE] to reset the PM count. [- / - / - ] 7-804-001 Paper [Execute] [SC/Jam Counter Reset] 7807 Clears the counters related to SC codes and paper jams. [- / - / - ] 7-807-001 [Execute] D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-264...
  • Page 840 [Self-Diagnose Result Display] 7832 Displays the result of the diagnostics. [- / - / - ] 7-832-001 [Execute] [Total Memory Size] 7836 Displays the memory capacity of the controller system. 7-836-001 Total Memory Size [- / - / - ] 5-265 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 841 For Single Path simultaneous duplex models only. Records the times detecting dust at all points of rear side scan position. When there is a same dust even when before starting the next job, consider as same dust and doesn't count. * Counts when SP4-020-011: DF D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-266...
  • Page 842 [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%/step] Screw Paper Transfer Roller 7-942-108 [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%/step] Unit 7-942-115 Fusing Unit [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%/step] 7-942-116 Fusing Belt [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%/step] 5-267 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 843 [0 to 4294967295 / 0 / 1mm/step] 7-944-116 Fusing Belt *ENG [0 to 4294967295 / 0 / 1mm/step] 7-944-118 Pressure Roller *ENG [0 to 4294967295 / 0 / 1mm/step] Bearing:Pressure 7-944-119 *ENG [0 to 4294967295 / 0 / 1mm/step] Roller D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-268...
  • Page 844 [0 to 255 / 255 / 1day/step] 7-951-206 ADF Pick-up Roller [0 to 255 / 255 / 1day/step] 7-951-207 ADF Supply Belt [0 to 255 / 255 / 1day/step] 7-951-208 ADF Reverse Roller [0 to 255 / 255 / 1day/step] 5-269 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 845 7-952-115 Fusing Unit [0 to 255 / 255 / 1day/step] 7-952-116 Fusing Belt [0 to 255 / 255 / 1day/step] 7-952-118 Pressure Roller [0 to 255 / 255 / 1day/step] Bearing:Pressure 7-952-119 [0 to 255 / 255 / 1day/step] Roller D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-270...
  • Page 846 [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%/step] 7-954-206 ADF Pick-up Roller [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%/step] 7-954-207 ADF Supply Belt [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%/step] 7-954-208 ADF Reverse Roller [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%/step] 5-271 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 847 7-955-115 Fusing Unit [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1page/step] 7-955-116 Fusing Belt [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1page/step] 7-955-118 Pressure Roller [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1page/step] Bearing:Pressure 7-955-119 [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1page/step] Roller D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-272...
  • Page 848 [0 to 255 / 255 / 1day/step] 7-956-206 ADF Pick-up Roller [0 to 255 / 255 / 1day/step] 7-956-207 ADF Supply Belt [0 to 255 / 255 / 1day/step] 7-956-208 ADF Reverse Roller [0 to 255 / 255 / 1day/step] 5-273 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 849 [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%/step] 7-960-206 ADF Pick-up Roller [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%/step] 7-960-207 ADF Supply Belt [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%/step] 7-960-208 ADF Reverse Roller [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%/step] D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-274...
  • Page 850 Unit 7-970-011 Displays sheets count since first use. Page:Registration *ENG [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1page/step] Drive Unit 7-970-012 Displays sheets count since first use. 7-970-014 Page:Exit Drive Unit *ENG [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1page/step] 5-275 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 851: Sp Mode Tables - Sp8000-1

    Grand total of the items counted for all applications Total: (Grand Total). (C, F, P, etc.). Copy application. Totals (pages, jobs, etc.) executed for each Fax application. application when the job was not stored on the Print application. document server. Scan application. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-276...

  • Page 852: Keys And Abbreviations In Data Log 2

    Keys and abbreviations in Data Log 2 Abbreviation What it means "By", e.g. "T:Jobs/Apl" = Total Jobs "by" Application > More (2> "2 or more", 4> "4 or more" AddBook Address Book Application Black & White Black Cyan ColCr Color Create ColMode Color Mode 5-277 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 853 Internet Fax Image Edit performed on the original with the copier GUI, e.g. ImgEdt border removal, adding stamps, page numbers, etc. Black (YMCK) Local Storage. Refers to the document server. LSize Large (paper) Size Magnification One color (monochrome) D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-278...
  • Page 854 This machine is under development and currently not available. Resolution Service Code (Error SC code displayed) Scan Sim, Simplex Simplex, printing on 1 side. S-to-Email Scan-to-E-mail SMC report printed with SP5990. All of the Group 8 counters are recorded in the SMC report. Server 5-279 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 855 When a fax is received to fax memory, the F: counter increments but the L: counter does not (the document server is not used).  A fax broadcast counts as one job for the F: counter (the fax destinations in the broadcast are not counted separately). D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-280...
  • Page 856 When a network application sends data to the document server, the O: counter increments.  When an image from Palm 2 is stored on the document server, the O: counter increments.  When a fax is sent to the document server, the F: counter increments. 5-281 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 857 When a copy job stored on the document server is printed with a network application (Web Image Monitor, for example), the C: counter increments.  When a fax on the document server is printed, the F: counter increments. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-282...
  • Page 858 When a stored copy job is sent from the document server, the C: counter increments.  When images stored on the document server by a network application or Palm2 are sent as an e-mail, the O: counter increments. 5-283 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 859 These SPs total finishing methods for fax jobs only. The finishing method is 8063 specified by the application. Note: Finishing features for fax jobs are not available at this time. [P:FIN Jobs] 8064 These SPs total finishing methods for print jobs only. The finishing method is specified by the application. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-284...
  • Page 860 Number of jobs started In any mode other than the Booklet mode and set for folding (Z-fold). Punch *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 / step] Number of jobs started in Punch mode. When Punch is set for a print job, the P: counter increments. (See SP8-064-6.) 5-285 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 861 These SPs count and calculate the number of print jobs by size based on the number of pages in the job. [S:Jobs/PGS] 8075 These SPs count and calculate the number of scan jobs by size based on the number of pages in the job. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-286...
  • Page 862  If a job is paused and re-started, it counts as one job.  If the finisher runs out of staples during a print and staple job, then the job is counted at the time the error occurs. 5-287 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 863 If the same document is faxed to both a public fax line and an I-Fax at a destination where both are available, then this counter increments, and the I-Fax counter (8 12x) also increments.  The fax job is counted when the job is scanned for sending, not when the job is sent. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-288...
  • Page 864 The counters for color are provided for future use; the color fax feature is not available at this time.  The fax job is counted when the job is scanned for sending, not when the job is sent. 5-289 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 865 For example, if the same document is sent by Scan-to-Email as well as Scan-to-PC, then it is counted twice (once for Scan-to-Email and once for Scan-to-PC). D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-290...
  • Page 866 If the job is cancelled during sending, it may or may not be counted, depending on what stage of the process had been reached when the job was cancelled.  Even if several files are combined for sending, the transmission counts as one job. 5-291 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 867 Note: At the present time, these counters perform identical counts.  This counts fax jobs started from a PC using a PC fax application, and sending the data out to the destination from the PC through the copier. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-292...
  • Page 868 These counters do not count reading user stamp data, or reading color charts to adjust color.  Previews done with a scanner driver are not counted.  A count is done only after all images of a job have been scanned.  Scans made in SP mode are not counted. 5-293 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 869 The L: counter counts the number of 8213 [F:Scan PGS/LS] *CTL pages stored from within the document 8215 [S:Scan PGS/LS] *CTL server mode screen at the operation panel, and with the Store File button 8216 [L:Scan PGS/LS] *CTL from within the Copy mode screen D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-294...
  • Page 870 When 1 sheet is fed for duplex scanning the Front count is 1 and the Back count is 1.  If a jam occurs during the job, recovery processing is not counted to avoid double counting. Also, the pages are not counted if the jam occurs before the first sheet is output. 5-295 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 871 If the user selects "Mixed Sizes" for copying in the platen mode, the Mixed Size count is enabled.  In the SADF mode if the user copies 1 page in platen mode and then copies 2 pages with SADF, the Platen count is 1 and the SADF count is 3. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-296...
  • Page 872 Store File button from within the Copy mode screen 8241 8242 8243 8245 8246 001 Text 002 Text/Photo 003 Photo 004 GenCopy, Pale 005 Map 006 Normal/Detail 007 Fine/Super Fine 008 Binary 009 Grayscale 010 Color 011 Other 5-297 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 873 TWAIN driver. These counters reveal how the TWAIN driver is used for delivery functions. 8285 [S:Scan PGS/TWAIN] *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 / step] Note: At the present time, these counters perform identical counts. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-298...
  • Page 874 [SP 8-443]. [S:Scan PGS/Size] These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Scan 8305 application. Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and output page size [SP 8-445]. 5-299 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 875 [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 / step] T:Scan PGS/Rez *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8311 These SPs count by resolution setting the total number of pages scanned by applications that can specify resolution settings. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-300...
  • Page 876 These counters are used primarily to calculate charges on use of the machine, so the following pages are not counted as printed pages: - Blank pages in a duplex printing job. - Blank pages inserted as document covers, chapter title sheets, and slip sheets. - Reports printed to confirm counts. 5-301 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 877 Fax jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the F: count. This SP counts the amount of paper (front/back counted as 1 page) used for 8411 Prints/Duplex *CTL duplex printing. Last pages printed only on one side are not counted. [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1] D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-302...
  • Page 878 004 Simplex Combine *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 / step] 005 Duplex Combine *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 / step] 006 2in1 *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 / step] 5-303 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 879 *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 / step] 023 9in1 + Magazine *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 / step] 024 16in1 + Magazine *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 / step] D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-304...
  • Page 880  Pages that are only partially printed with the n-Up functions are counted as 1 page.  Here is a summary of how the counters work for Booklet and Magazine modes: 8421 8422 8423 8424 8425 8426 8427 5-305 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 881 These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features below with the print application. [L:PrtPGS/ImgEdt] 8436 These SPs count the total number of pages output from within the document server mode window at the operation panel with the three features below. 8437 [O:PrtPGS/ImgEdt] D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-306...
  • Page 882 These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the printer application. [S:PrtPGS/Ppr Size] 8445 These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the scanner application. 8446 [L:PrtPGS/Ppr Size] 5-307 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 883 [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 / step] 254 Other (Standard) *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 / step] 255 Other (Custom) *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 / step]  These counters do not distinguish between LEF and SEF. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-308...
  • Page 884 Currently not used. 012 Tray 11 *CTL Currently not used. 013 Tray 12 *CTL Currently not used. 014 Tray 13 *CTL Currently not used. 015 Tray 14 *CTL Currently not used. 016 Tray 15 *CTL Currently not used. 5-309 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 885: Sp Mode Tables - Sp8000-2

    [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 / step] 003 Special *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 / step] 004 Thick *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 / step] 005 Normal (Back) *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 / step] D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-310...
  • Page 886 [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 / step] 8484 [P:PrtPGS/TonSave] *CTL These SPs count the number of pages printed with the Toner Save feature switched on. Note: These SPs return the same results as this SP is limited to the Print application. 5-311 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 887 [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 / step] 016 XPS  SP8 511 and SP8 514 return the same results as they are both limited to the Print application.  Print jobs output to the document server are not counted. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-312...
  • Page 888 [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 / step] 005 Z-Fold *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 / step] 006 Punch *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 / step] 007 Other *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 / step] 5-313 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 889 The counts for staple finishing are based on output to the staple tray, so jam recoveries are counted. This SP counts the amount of staples 8531 [Staples] *CTL used by the machine. [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 / step] D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-314...
  • Page 890 Booklet finishing Not used 002 Ring-Bind *CTL 8561 [T:A Sheet Of Paper] 001 Total: Over A3/DLT *CTL 002 Total: Under A3/DLT *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1] 003 Duplex: Over A3/DLT *CTL 004 Duplex: Under A3/DLT *CTL 5-315 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 891 *CTL 004 Duplex: Under A3/DLT *CTL 8566 [L:A Sheet Of Paper] 001 Total: Over A3/DLT *CTL 002 Total: Under A3/DLT *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1] 003 Duplex: Over A3/DLT *CTL 004 Duplex: Under A3/DLT *CTL D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-316...
  • Page 892 These SPs count the total coverage for the total printout pages for each printing mode. 001 B/W *CTL [0 to 2147483647 / 0 / 1% / step] 011 B/W Printing Pages *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 / step] 5-317 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 893 002 SDK-2 *CTL 003 SDK-3 *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 / step] 004 SDK-4 *CTL 005 SDK-5 *CTL 006 SDK-6 *CTL 007 SDK-7 *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 / step] 008 SDK-8 *CTL D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-318...
  • Page 894 011 Function-011 *CTL 012 Function-012 *CTL 013 Function-013 *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 / step] 014 Function-014 *CTL 015 Function-015 *CTL 016 Function-016 *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 / step] 017 Function-017 *CTL 5-319 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 895 031 Function-031 *CTL 032 Function-032 *CTL 033 Function-033 *CTL 034 Function-034 *CTL 035 Function-035 *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 / step] 036 Function-036 *CTL 037 Function-037 *CTL 038 Function-038 *CTL 039 Function-039 *CTL 040 Function-040 *CTL D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-320...
  • Page 896 [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 / step] 056 Function-056 *CTL 057 Function-057 *CTL 058 Function-058 *CTL 059 Function-059 *CTL 060 Function-060 *CTL 061 Function-061 *CTL 062 Function-062 *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 / step] 063 Function-063 *CTL 064 Function-064 *CTL 5-321 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 897 At the present time, this feature is provided for the Fax application only so SP8641 and SP8643 are the same.  The counts include error pages.  If a document is sent to more than one destination with a Group transmission, the count is done for each destination. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-322...
  • Page 898 For example, if a 10-page document is sent to 200 addresses, the count is 10 for the first 100 destinations and the count is also 10 for the second 100 destinations, for a total of 20.). 5-323 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 899 These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent with Scan-to-PC with the Scan application. 001 B/W *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 step] 002 Color *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 step] D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-324...
  • Page 900 If several documents are merged for sending, the number of pages stored are counted for the application that stored them.  When several documents are sent by a Fax broadcast, the F: count is done for the number of pages sent to each destination. 5-325 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 901 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1 / step] 006 PDF/A *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1 / step] 007 PDF(OCR) *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1 / step] 008 PDF/Comp(OCR) *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1 / step] 009 PDF/A(OCR) D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-326...
  • Page 902 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1 / step] 003 PSTN-3 *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1 / step] 004 ISDN (G3,G4) *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1 / step] 005 Network *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1 / step] 5-327 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 903 [Toner Remain] 8801 These SPs display the percent of toner remaining for each color. This SP allows the user to check the toner supply at any time. 001 K *CTL [0 to 100 / 0 / 10% / step] D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-328...
  • Page 904 [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 / step] 031 5 to 7%: BK *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 / step] 041 8 to 10%: BK *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 / step] 5-329 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 905 *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 / step] [Page/Toner_Prev2] 8911 These SPs display the amount of the remaining 2nd previous toner for each color. 001 BK *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 / step] D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-330...
  • Page 906 Includes time while machine is performing background printing. Does not include time machine remains powered off with the power switches. *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 / step] Total time when SC errors have been staying. 5-331 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 907 Fax relay destination registrations for relay TX. F-Code *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1 / step] F-Code box registrations. Copy Program *CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 255 / step] Copy application registrations with the Program (job settings) feature. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-332...
  • Page 908 006 Reading Time *CTL 007 Eng Waiting Time *CTL 008 Low Power State Time *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 / step] 009 Silent State Time *CTL 010 Heater Off State Time *CTL 011 LCD on Time *CTL 5-333 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 909 103 Fax Transmission *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 / step] Scanner Transmission: *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 / step] Color Scanner Transmission: *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 / step] D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-334...

  • Page 910: Printer Sp Mode

    If this bit switch is enabled, print jobs will be saved to the GW SD slot and not output to paper. bit 5 bit 6 bit 7 [RPCS,PCL]: Printable area frame border Disabled Enabled Prints all RPCS and PCL jobs with a border around the printable area. 5-335 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 911 Enables/Disables the MFPs ability to change the PDL processor mid-job. Some host systems submit jobs that contain both PS and PCL5e/c. If Auto PDL switching is disabled, these jobs will not be printed properly. bit 4 bit 5 bit 6 bit 7 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-336...
  • Page 912 Uses the same left margin as older HP models such as HP4000/HP8000. In other words, the left margin defined in the job (usually "<ESC>*r0A") will be changed to "<ESC>*r1A". bit 3 bit 4 bit 5 bit 6 bit 7 5-337 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 913 If enabled, the simplex pages of IPDS jobs will be printed on the front side because of printing on the back side of the page. This might reduce printing speed. bit 4 bit 5 bit 6 bit 7 You can enable/disable the port for IPDS printing. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-338...
  • Page 914 Increase max. number of stored jobs. (100) (750) Changes the maximum number of jobs that can be stored on the HDD. The default (disabled) is 100. If this is enabled, the max. will be raised to 750 or 1000 depending on the model. 5-339 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 915 This could result in problems with letterhead/pre-printed pages. Only affects pages specified as Letterhead paper. 1001 [Bit Switch] 006 Bit Switch 6 Setting bit 0 bit 1 bit 2 bit 3 bit 4 bit 5 bit 6 bit 7 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-340...
  • Page 916 User Code without a user code) BW jobs submitted without a user code will be printed even if usercode authentication is enabled. Note: Color jobs will not be printed without a valid user code. 5-341 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 917 If this bit switch, all jobs will be cancelled after a jam occurs. Note: If this bitsw is enabled, printing under the following conditions might result in problems: - Job submission via USB or Parallel Port - Spool printing (WIM >Configuration > Device Settings > System) D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-342...
  • Page 918 UTF-8 characters cannot be displayed in the operation panel. For example, job names are sometimes stored in the MIB using UTF-8 encoded characters. When these are displayed on the operation panel, they will be garbled unless this BitSw is enabled (=0). 5-343 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 919 SSEJ SSEJ If this is 1, then after a job is stored using Store and Skip Errored Job (SSEJ), new jobs cannot be added to the queue until the stored job has been completely printed. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-344...
  • Page 920 0 (default): Print jobs are not interrupted. If a job is promoted to the top of the print queue, it will wait for the currently printing job to finish. 1: If a job is promoted to the top of the queue, it will interrupt the currently printing job and start printing immediately. 5-345 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 921 Command" or "Any Type". - Apply Auto Paper Select = OFF: Overwritten (priority is given to the job’s commands) - Apply Auto Paper Select = ON: Not overwritten (priority is given to the device settings) bit 5 bit 6 bit 7 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-346...
  • Page 922 Initializes settings in the "System" menu of the user mode. [- / - / -] 1-003-003 Delete Program *CTL [Execute] [Print Summary] 1004 Prints the service summary sheet (a summary of all the controller settings). [- / - / -] 1-004-001 Print Summary *CTL [Execute] 5-347 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 923 [ 0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step ] *CTL 0: Excluding New Job 1: Including New Job 1-111-001 Selects whether to include an image processing job in jobs subject to full cancellation from the SCS job list. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-348...

  • Page 924: Scanner Sp Mode

    This SP switches the TWAIN scanner function on/off. This is one of the scanner application functions. 1010 [Non Display ClearLight PDF] 0: Display 1: [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step] *CTL Nondisplay 0: Display, 1: Nondisplay 1-010-001 Display or Non display remote scan. 5-349 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 925 Sets enable or disable multi-media function. 1-013-002 Default is different with operation panel type. If media slot (USB/SD) mounted on the operation panel is standard, default is “1”. If media slot (USB/SD) mounted on the operation panel is optional, default is “0”. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-350...
  • Page 926 FlairAPI http server. If it is 0, scanning Start of FlairAPI FlairAPI function and simple bit 0 (Do not Server (Start) UI function will be disabled. Start) The machine installed Android operating panel option, set “1”, others set “0”. 5-351 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 927 If it is “1”, accessing is outside of the allowed from outside of machine FlairAPI such as PC, Remote UI, IT-Box etc… bit 2 Reserved bit 3 Reserved bit 4 Reserved Reserved bit 5 Reserved Reserved bit 6 Reserved bit 7 Reserved D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-352...

  • Page 928: Sp2-Xxx (Scanning-Image Quality)

    Selects the compression ratio for clearlight PDF for the two settings that can be selected at the operation panel. Compression Ratio 2-025-001 *CTL [5 to 95 / 25 / 1 / step] (Normal) JPEG2000 Compression Ratio 2-025-002 *CTL [5 to 95 / 20 / 1 / step] (High) JEPG2000 5-353 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 929 [0 to 255 / 250 / 1 / step] White Pix Ratio: 0 - 2-030-002 *CTL [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 / step] White Tile Ratio: 0 2-030-003 *CTL [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 / step] -100 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-354...

  • Page 930: Input Check Table

    (0: paper exist, 1: paper non exist) [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] Transport Sensor 2 0: paper exist 1: paper non exist 5-803-005 Responds to paper existence on 2nd carry sensor position. (0: paper exist, 1: paper non exist) 5-355 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 931 (0: paper exist, 1: paper non exist) [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] Duplex Entrance Sensor 0: paper exist 1: paper non exist 5-803-011 Responds to paper existence on duplex entrance sensor position. (0: paper exist, 1: paper non exist) D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-356...
  • Page 932 Detects paper is running out on 1st paper feed tray. (0: No paper, 1: paper remaining) [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] Tray 1 Set Switch 0: set 1:not set 5-803-016 Detects that 1st paper feed tray is set to main unit. (0: set, 1:not set) 5-357 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 933 Detects that 2nd paper feed tray is set to main unit. (0: set, 1:not set) Tray 2 Size Switch [0 to 15 / 0 / 1/step] 5-803-021 Value changes depending on paper size (fence position) set to 2nd paper feed tray. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-358...
  • Page 934 0: close 1: open 5-803-026 Detects right door status. (0: close, 1: open) [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] Duplex Guide Plate Open/Close 0: close Switch 1: open 5-803-027 Detects duplex guide plate status. (0: close, 1: open) 5-359 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 935 Detects that toner bottle is set to main unit. (0: set, 1:not set) [0 to 15 / 0 / 1/step] Fusing Set & Country Detection 0111:200V system 1011:100V System 5-803-038 Detects region of fusing unit. (0111: 200V system, 1011: 100V System) D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-360...
  • Page 936 (0: Running, 1: Stopped, or locked) [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] Paper Exit Cooling Fan: Lock 0: Running 1: Stopped, or locked 5-803-058 Detects locking of paper exit cooling fan. (0: Running, 1: Stopped, or locked) 5-361 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 937 Detects locking of transfer drum motor K. (0: Running, 1: Stopped, or locked) [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] HVP/Separation DC/(-):Abnormal 0: SC detected Detection 1: Normal 5-803-067 Detects SC of HVP (secession). (0: SC detected, 1: Normal) D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-362...
  • Page 938 [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 0: set Key Counter:Set Sensor 1 1:unset key counter: set 1=0, 2=1 5-803-072 for set, others for unset Detects setting of key counter. (0: set, 1:unset) (key counter: set 1=0, 2=1 for set, others for unset) 5-363 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 939 (0: set, 1:not set) [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] Bridge Relay Sensor 0: paper exist 1: paper non exist 5-803-077 Responds to paper existence on carry sensor position or bridge unit. (0: paper exist, 1: paper non exist) D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-364...
  • Page 940 (left exit tray). (0: close, 1: open) [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] Shift Tray Set Detection 01: set Mechanism 11:not set 5-803-084 Detects that shift tray is set to main unit. (01: set, 11:not set) 5-365 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 941 [0 to 15 / 0 / 1/step] 5-803-101 Value changes depending on paper size of tray 1. [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] Controller Fan:Lock 0: Running 5-803-102 1: Stopped, or locked Detects CTL fan lock status. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-366...
  • Page 942 [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] Bank: Feed Cover Open 0: cover open 5-803-218 Detection 2 1: cover closed 5-803-219 LCT Paper Supply Open/Close [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 5-803-220 LCT Slide Open/Close 0: slide open 1: slide closed 5-367 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 943: Adf D779 - Input Check

    [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 6-007-015 Feed Cover Sensor [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 6-007-016 Lift Up Sensor [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 6-007-023 Rear Edge Detection [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-368...

  • Page 944: 1-Pass Adf D683 - Input Check

    Gets sensor information from ADF. Gives 1 when there is a paper at sensor area. Original Width 3 [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 6-011-006 Gets sensor information from ADF. Gives 1 when there is a paper at sensor area. 5-369 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 945 Gets sensor information from ADF. Gives 1 when there is a paper at sensor area. Exit Sensor [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 6-011-014 Gets sensor information from ADF. Gives 1 when there is a paper at sensor area. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-370...
  • Page 946 Gets sensor information from ADF. Gives 1 when pick up roller is not in the correct position. Original Length 4 (LT/A4 [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] Tail Sensor) 6-011-023 Gets sensor information from ADF. Gives 1 when there is a paper at sensor area. 5-371 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 947: 2000/3000 Sheets Finisher D688 / D689 - Input Check5-372

    Gets information of specified sensor. Displays signal level of sensor as it is. Punch Move HP Sensor [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 6-123-009 Gets information of specified sensor. Displays signal level of sensor as it is. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-372...
  • Page 948 Gets information of specified sensor. Displays signal level of sensor as it is. Booklet Jog Solenoid HP [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] Sensor 6-123-018 Gets information of specified sensor. Displays signal level of sensor as it is. 5-373 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 949 [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] HP Sensor 6-123-027 Gets information of specified sensor. Displays signal level of sensor as it is. * Not Use: Currently, Booklet Finisher SR3170 (D688) / Finisher SR3160 (D689) do not have setting jogger in system configuration. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-374...
  • Page 950 Gets information of specified sensor. Displays signal level of sensor as it is. Corner Stapler Paper [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] Height Sensor 2 6-123-037 Gets information of specified sensor. Displays signal level of sensor as it is. 5-375 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 951 Gets information of specified sensor. Displays signal level of sensor as it is. Booklet Stapler Staple [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] End Sensor: Rear 6-123-046 Gets information of specified sensor. Displays signal level of sensor as it is. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-376...
  • Page 952 [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] Shift Jogger Set Detection 0: connected 1: not connected 6-123-054 Gets connection status of setting jogger unit. * Not Use: Currently, Booklet Finisher SR3170 (D688) / Finisher SR3160 (D689) do not have setting jogger in system configuration. 5-377 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 953 Gets information of specified switch. Displays signal level of switch as it is. Punch Selection DIPSW 2 [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 6-123-061 Gets information of specified switch. Displays signal level of switch as it is. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-378...

  • Page 954: Internal Finisher D690 - Input Check

    [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 6-135-016 Stopper HP Sensor [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 6-135-017 Punch HP Sensor [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] Punch Pluse Count 6-135-018 [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] Sensor 5-379 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 955: Sheets Finisher D687 - Input Check

    6-161-006 [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] Open/Close HP Sensor Shift Paper Exit (Lift Tray 6-161-007 [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] Exit) Sensor Positioning Roller HP 6-161-008 [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] Sensor D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-380...
  • Page 956 [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 6-161-023 Punch HP Sensor [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 6-161-024 Punch RP Sensor [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 6-161-025 Punch Hopper Full Sensor [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 5-381 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 957 [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] Sensor 6-161-036 Fold Blade HP Sensor [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 6-161-037 Fold Cam HP Sensor [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] TE Stopper Transport 6-161-038 [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] Sensor D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-382...
  • Page 958 6161 Gets information of specified switch. Displays signal level of switch as it is. 6-161-043 Door Open/Close SW [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 6-161-044 Lift Tray Upper Limit SW [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 5-383 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 959: Bridge Unit D685 - Input Check

    Gets micro SW information of bridge unit. When cover open, 1. Main unit paper exit cover. Bridge Relay Cover [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 6-170-005 Gets micro SW information of bridge unit. When cover open, 1. Finisher side cover. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-384...

  • Page 960: Internal Finisher D766 - Input Check

    Off, 1: Sensor On, “0“ appears if sensor detects home position) Tray Full Detection Sensor 1 [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 6-184-008 Gets the tray full detection sensor 1 information of non staple finisher. (0: Paper overflow ) 5-385 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 961: Internal Shift Tray D691 - Input Check

    [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 6-174-001 Gets connection information of 1 bin and main unit. When connected, 1. 1bin Paper Detection Sensor [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 6-174-002 Gets paper existence sensor information from 1 bin. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-386...

  • Page 962: Output Check Table

    [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 5-804-007 Tray 2 Lift Motor:CW 5-804-008 Tray 2 Lift Motor:CCW [OUTPUT Check] 5804 Moves register motor. Registration Motor:CCW:Std 5-804-009 Speed Registration Motor:CCW:Mid 5-804-010 [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] Speed Registration Motor:CCW:Low 5-804-011 Speed 5-387 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 963 Moves vertical carry motor. Vertical Transport Motor:CW:Std 5-804-028 Speed Vertical Transport Motor:CW:Mid 5-804-029 [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] Speed Vertical Transport Motor:CW:Low 5-804-030 Speed Vertical Transport Motor:CW:Std 5-804-031 [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] Speed:IncSpd D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-388...
  • Page 964 [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 5-804-057 Inverter Motor:CCW:Mid Speed [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 5-804-058 Inverter Motor:CCW:Low Speed [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] Inverter Motor:CCW:Std 5-804-061 [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] Speed:IncSpd 5-389 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 965 Speed:Feed Speed 5-804-077 Duplex Bypass Motor:CCW:Std Speed [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 5-804-078 Duplex Bypass Motor:CCW:Mid Speed [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 5-804-079 Duplex Bypass Motor:CCW:Low Speed [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-390...
  • Page 966 Holds position of duplex bypass motor. [OUTPUT Check] 5804 Moves fusing motor. *See Important below 5-804-092 Fusing/Fusing Exit Motor:CCW:Std Speed 5-804-093 Fusing/Fusing Exit Motor:CCW:Mid Speed [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 5-804-094 Fusing/Fusing Exit Motor:CCW:Low Speed 5-804-098 Fusing/Fusing Exit Motor:CW:Low Speed 5-391 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 967 Runs motor with 38267 rpm. Fusing Fan: Full Speed [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 5-804-110 Moves fusing exhaust heat fan. Fusing Fan: Half Speed [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 5-804-111 Moves fusing exhaust heat fan. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-392...
  • Page 968 [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 5-804-124 Drum Motor:Std Speed [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 5-804-125 Drum Motor:Mid Speed [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 5-804-126 Drum Motor:Low Speed [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 5-393 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 969 Moves relay divide solenoid (bridge unit)/left paper exit divide solenoid (left paper exit tray). <Shift Tray> Lift Motor:CW [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 5-804-170 Moves shift tray motor. <Shift Tray> Lift Motor:CCW [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 5-804-171 Moves shift tray motor. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-394...
  • Page 970 [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 5-804-206 Lights paper transfer open/close LED. ID Sensor [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 5-804-209 Lights TM/P sensor: Center glowing part. ID Tag Power [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 5-804-211 Powers the HST sensor. 5-395 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 971 Turns OPC quenching LCD on Waste Toner Open/Close [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] Solenoid:CW 5-804-252 Moves waste toner open/close solenoid clockwise. Anti-Condensation Heater Relay [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 5-804-253 Turns Anti-Condensation Heater Relay on D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-396...

  • Page 972: Adf D779 - Output Check

    [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 6-008-013 Interval drives FAN motor. Feed Clutch [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 6-008-014 Interval drives paper feed clutch. Feed Solenoid [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 6-008-015 Interval drives paper feed solenoid. 5-397 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 973: 1-Pass Adf D683 - Output Check

    [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] Bottom Plate Motor 0:Off For/Rev 1:On 6-012-010 Moves up/down the bottom plate by driving the ADF bottom plate motor forward, backward. [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] Stamp 0:Off 6-012-012 1:On Stamps the DONE stamp. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-398...

  • Page 974: 2000/3000 Sheets Finisher D688 / D689 - Output Check

    Drives specified motor for a certain period of time to test operation. Upper Junction Solenoid [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 6-124-006 Turns NO/OFF specified solenoid for validation. 6-124-007 TE Stack Plate Motor [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 5-399 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 975 [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 6-124-015 Drives specified motor for a certain period of time to test operation. Booklet Stapler Move [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] Motor 6-124-016 Drives specified motor for a certain period of time to test operation. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-400...
  • Page 976 [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 6-124-026 Drives specified motor for a certain period of time to test operation. Shift Motor [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 6-124-027 Drives specified motor for a certain period of time to test operation. 5-401 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 977 LE Guide Motor [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 6-124-032 Drives specified motor for a certain period of time to test operation. Navigation LED (All) [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 6-124-033 Lights all guide LED. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-402...

  • Page 978: Internal Finisher D690 - Output Check

    [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 6-136-013 Punch Motor [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 6-136-014 Punch Moving Motor [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] Punch Registration 6-136-015 [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] Moving Motor 5-403 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 979: Sheets Finisher D687 - Output Check

    [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 6-162-015 Punch Move Motor [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] S-to-S Registration 6-162-016 [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] Detection Move Motor Stack Transport Motor: 6-162-017 [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] Upper D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-404...
  • Page 980 [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 6-162-022 Folder Blade Motor [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] [FIN (1K FIN) OUTPUT Check] 6162 Lights all guide LED. 6-162-023 Navigation LED (All) [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 5-405 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 981: Bridge Unit D685 - Output Check

    Checks operation of the load of solenoid. Turns ON the solenoid. 5.18.8 INTERNAL SHIFT TRAY D691 – OUTPUT CHECK 6173 [Shift Tray: OUTPUT Check] Shift Tray Motor [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 6-173-001 Checks operation of the load of shift tray motor. Rotates forward. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-406...

  • Page 982: Internal Finisher D766 - Output Check

    [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] Motor 6-185-004 Checks the exit pressure release motor’s movement of non staple finisher. Stapler Motor [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 6-185-005 Checks the stapler motor’s movement of non staple finisher. 5-407 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 983: Test Pattern Printing

    Hounds tooth V 2dot Horizontal Line Black Band H (Horizontal) Grid Vert (Grid Vert ical Line) Black Band V (Vertical) Grid Horizontal (Grid Horizontal Line) Checker Flag Pattern Grid Pattern Small Grayscale V (Vertical) Grid Pattern Large Grayscale H (Horizontal) D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-408...
  • Page 984 Test Pattern Printing Pattern Pattern Argyle Pattern Small 2 Beam Density Pttrn Argyle P:L (Argyle Pattern Large) Full Dot Pattern 1dot Ind. Pttrn (1dot Independent All White Pattern Pattern) 2dot Ind. Pttrn (2dot Independent Pattern) 5-409 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 985: Firmware Update

    Media print Controller board MediaPrint:JPEG/TIF JPEG/TIFF Font Controller board FONT Font 1 Controller board FONT1 Network document Controller board NetworkDocBox Printer Controller board Printer Scanner Controller board Scanner Web support Controller board Websupport Web Application Controller board WebUapl D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-410...

  • Page 986: Procedure

    If SC818 is generated during software update, switch the power OFF -> ON, and complete the update which was interrupted.  During software update, network cables, remove interface cables, wireless boards, etc., (so that they are not accessed during update). 5-411 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 987: Update Procedure

    Wait until the update screen starts (about 45 seconds). When it appears, "Please Wait" is displayed. Check whether a program installation screen is displayed. (English display) When two or more software modules are contained in the SD card, they are displayed as follows. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-412...
  • Page 988 Select the module with the module selection button or 10 key operation. The selected module is highlighted, and [Verify] and [Update] are displayed.  Depending on the combination of update software, it may not be possible to select simultaneously. 5-413 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 989 In the lower row, a progress bar is displayed in ten steps. (The more *, the more the progress.)  When updating the control unit program, since progress cannot be displayed on the screen, the ROM update process is determined when the LED of the [Start] key changes from red to green. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-414...
  • Page 990 (The program installed in the PS3 card is a dongle (key) for enabling PS3 function).  Due to the above specification, the self-diagnosis result report shows the ROM module number / software version of the PDF firmware at the PS location. 5-415 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 991: Error Screens During Updating

    Decompression of Switch the main power supply off and compressed data failed. on to try again.  Replace the SD card used for the update.  Replace the controller board if the above solutions do not solve the problem. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-416...
  • Page 992 A card for the wrong each destination (JPN/ EXP/ OEM) in destination is inserted. the SD card.  Model error. Install the correct ROM update data for A card for the wrong model is each model in the SD card. inserted. 5-417 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 993  Printing download fails. Switch the main power supply off and on to try again.  The SD card media is damaged if the update fails again. Replace the SD card media. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-418...
  • Page 994 Replace the HDD if the download fails again.  The module ID for the Prepare the correct package files. package firmware update is incorrect.  The configuration of the Prepare the correct package files. package firmware update files is incorrect. 5-419 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 995 Acquisition of the latest Check that the network is connected version information from the correctly. Gateway fails.  Download fails at the reserved Check that the network is connected date/time of the remote correctly. firmware update from the network. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-420...
  • Page 996 Replace the HDD if the download fails again.  The module ID for the Prepare the correct package files. package firmware update is incorrect.  The configuration of the Prepare the correct package files. package firmware update files is incorrect. 5-421 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 997 Acquisition of the latest Check that the network is connected version information from the correctly. Gateway fails.  Download fails at the reserved Check that the network is connected date/time of the remote correctly. firmware update from the network. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-422...
  • Page 998 The PS3 firmware is a dongle (key) which enables PS3 data printing functions. When the PS3 firmware is installed, the PS3 program in the PDF firmware is enabled. Due to this specification, the self-diagnosis result report shows the ROM part number/software version of the PDF firmware contained in the PS3 program. 5-423 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 999: Updating Javavm

    Insert the SD card you created into the service slot, and then turn ON the main power switch. After booting Java VM, update of the application is started. "Updating SDK/J" appears in the banner message of the touch panel display. (Estimated time: about 2 minutes) D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-424...

  • Page 1000: List Of Error Messages

    End time boot script processing, the 2012/08/22 17:59:47 end SUCCESS results script file Boot script path /mnt/sd0/sdk/update/bootscript Boot scripts processing start time Failure 2012/08/22 17:57:47 start Error message (Possibly multiple) XXXX Error End time boot script processing, the 2012/08/22 17:57:57 end FAIL results 5-425 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...
  • Page 1001 "model name, application configuration, made. SMC sheet paseCopy() - error : fileCopy (SP5-990-006/024/025), Error. and error file." Copy Error! Put Error! *1 Error, not normally expected If you cannot uninstall it, to occur implement escalation Copy Error! *1 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-426...
  • Page 1002 Error Message Cause Remedy Delete Error! stating the "model name, application configuration, [XXXXX] is an unsupported SMC sheet command. (SP5-990-006/024/025), and error file." Version Error Without the foregoing error message, only "Put Error / Copy Error" will be displayed 5-427 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 1003: Updating The Exjs

    Press the [Extension function default setting] button. 10. Press the [Extension function default setting] button on the [Extension function default menu setting] screen. 11. Stop "Extended JS" on the “Startup setting” condition with a tab. 12. Switch the power OFF. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-428...
  • Page 1004 Steps 5-9, and perform Step 1 and subsequent steps. In that case, skip Steps 5-10. (This saves time.)  If you do not plan to update Extension JavaScript, return the controller cover to the original position after performing Step 5. 5-429 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 1005: When Checking The Version Of Exjs

    Check the version of [Extended JS] on the [Startup settings] tab is the latest version.  If checked apart from the above procedure (firmware version displayed in system default settings), a different version from the actual version may be displayed. D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-430...

  • Page 1006: Nvram Data Upload/Download

    Switch the copier main power switch off. Remove the SD card slot cover [A] ( x1). Insert the SD card into SD slot 2 [A]. Turn on the main power switch. Execute SP5-824-001 (NVRAM Data Upload) and then press the “Execute” key. 5-431 D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202...

  • Page 1007: Downloading An Sd Card To Nvram

    The serial number of the file on the SD card must match the serial number of the machine for the NVRAM data to download successfully. The download fails if the serial numbers do not match. This procedure does not download the following data to the NVRAM:  Total Count  C/O, P/O Count D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202 5-432...

This manual is also suitable for:

D198D202D200D199D201

Table of Contents